SAB80C535-M-T40 [INFINEON]

Microcontroller, 8-Bit, 16MHz, CMOS, PQFP80, PLASTIC, MQFP-80;
SAB80C535-M-T40
型号: SAB80C535-M-T40
厂家: Infineon    Infineon
描述:

Microcontroller, 8-Bit, 16MHz, CMOS, PQFP80, PLASTIC, MQFP-80

时钟 微控制器 外围集成电路
文件: 总270页 (文件大小:2793K)
中文:  中文翻译
下载:  下载PDF数据表文档文件
Microcomputer Components  
SAB 80515/SAB 80C515  
8-Bit Single-Chip Microcontroller Family  
User's Manual 08.95  
SAB 80515 / SAB 80C515 Family  
Revision History: 8.95  
Previous Releases: 12.90/10.92  
Page  
Subjects (changes since last revision)  
30  
Modified timing diagram (PSEN rising edge)  
39  
80  
More detailed description of ACMOS port structure  
Differential output impedance of analog reference supply voltage now: 1 kΩ  
Second paragraph: additional description; WDT reset information added  
SWDT reset information added  
Figure 7-51 corrected  
Encoding of ADD A, direct corrected  
Encoding of CPL bit corrected  
New release of SAB 80C515 / SAB 80C535 data sheet inserted  
New release of SAB 80515 / SAB 80535 data sheet inserted  
105  
106  
109  
137  
152  
243  
301  
Edition 08.95  
Published by Siemens AG,  
Bereich Halbleiter, Marketing-  
Kommunikation, Balanstraße 73,  
81541 München  
©
Siemens AG 1995.  
All Rights Reserved.  
Attention please!  
As far as patents or other rights of third parties are concerned, liability is only assumed for components, not for applications, processes  
and circuits implemented within components or assemblies.  
The information describes the type of component and shall not be considered as assured characteristics.  
Terms of delivery and rights to change design reserved.  
For questions on technology, delivery and prices please contact the Semiconductor Group Offices in Germany or the Siemens Companies  
and Representatives worldwide (see address list).  
Due to technical requirements components may contain dangerous substances. For information on the types in question please contact  
your nearest Siemens Office, Semiconductor Group.  
Siemens AG is an approved CECC manufacturer.  
Packing  
Please use the recycling operators known to you. We can also help you – get in touch with your nearest sales office. By agreement we will  
take packing material back, if it is sorted. You must bear the costs of transport.  
For packing material that is returned to us unsorted or which we are not obliged to accept, we shall have to invoice you for any costs in-  
curred.  
Components used in life-support devices or systems must be expressly authorized for such purpose!  
1
2
Critical components of the Semiconductor Group of Siemens AG, may only be used in life-support devices or systems with the express  
written approval of the Semiconductor Group of Siemens AG.  
1
A critical component is a component used in a life-support device or system whose failure can reasonably be expected to cause the  
failure of that life-support device or system, or to affect its safety or effectiveness of that device or system.  
2
Life support devices or systems are intended (a) to be implanted in the human body, or (b) to support and/or maintain and sustain hu-  
man life. If they fail, it is reasonable to assume that the health of the user may be endangered.  
Contents  
Page  
Contents  
1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6  
2
2.1  
Fundamental Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10  
Differences between MYMOS (SAB 80515/80535) and  
ACMOS (SAB 80C515/80C535) Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13  
Power Saving Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13  
Special Function Register PCON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13  
Port Driver Circuitries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14  
The A/D Converter Input Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14  
A/D Converter Timings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15  
The Oscillator and Clock Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15  
The VBB Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15  
2.1.1  
2.1.2  
2.1.3  
2.1.4  
2.1.5  
2.1.6  
2.1.7  
3
3.1  
3.2  
Central Processing Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16  
General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16  
CPU Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17  
4
Memory Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19  
Program Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19  
Data Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19  
General Purpose Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23  
Special Function Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23  
4.1  
4.2  
4.3  
4.4  
5
External Bus Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27  
Accessing External Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27  
PSEN, Program Store Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29  
ALE, Address Latch Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29  
Overlapping External Data and Program Memory Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29  
5.1  
5.2  
5.3  
5.4  
6
6.1  
6.1.1  
6.1.2  
System Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31  
Hardware Reset and Power-Up Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31  
Reset Function and Circuitries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31  
Hardware Reset Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34  
7
On-Chip Peripheral Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35  
Parallel I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35  
Port Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35  
7.1  
7.1.1  
7.1.1.1 Digital I/O Port Circuitry (MYMOS/ACMOS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36  
7.1.1.2 MYMOS Port Driver Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39  
7.1.1.3 ACMOS Port Driver Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39  
7.1.2  
7.1.3  
7.1.4  
Port 0 and Port 2 Used as Address/Data Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41  
Alternate Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42  
Port Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44  
7.1.4.1 Port Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44  
Semiconductor Group  
3
Contents  
Page  
Contents  
7.1.4.2 Port Loading and Interfacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45  
7.1.4.3 Read-Modify-Write Feature of Ports 0 through 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45  
7.2  
Serial Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47  
Operating Modes of Serial Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47  
Multiprocessor Communication Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50  
Baud Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50  
Detailed Description of the Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54  
7.2.1  
7.2.2  
7.2.3  
7.2.4  
7.2.4.1 Mode 0, Synchronous Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54  
7.2.4.2 Mode 1, 8-Bit UART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55  
7.2.4.3 Mode 2, 9-Bit UART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57  
7.2.4.4 Mode 3, 9-Bit UART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57  
7.3  
Timer 0 and Timer 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65  
Mode 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68  
Mode 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69  
Mode 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70  
Mode 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71  
A/D Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72  
Function and Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74  
7.3.1  
7.3.2  
7.3.3  
7.3.4  
7.4  
7.4.1  
7.4.1.1 lnitialization and Input Channel Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74  
7.4.1.2 Start of Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75  
7.4.2  
7.4.3  
7.5  
7.5.1  
7.5.2  
Reference Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76  
A/D Converter Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80  
Timer 2 with Additional Compare/Capture/Reload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82  
Timer 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85  
Compare Function of Registers CRC, CC1 to CC3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88  
7.5.2.1 Compare Mode 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88  
7.5.2.2 Compare Mode 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92  
7.5.2.3 Using Interrupts in Combination with the Compare Function . . . . . . . . . . . . .94  
7.5.3  
7.6  
7.6.1  
Capture Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96  
Power Saving Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98  
Power Saving Modes of the SAB 80515/80535 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99  
7.6.1.1 Power-Down Mode of the SAB 80515/80535 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99  
7.6.2 Power Saving Modes of the SAB 80515/80535 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100  
7.6.2.1 Power-Down Mode of the SAB 80C515/80C535 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101  
7.6.2.2 Idle Mode of the SAB 80C515/80C535 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102  
7.7  
Watchdog Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105  
Semiconductor Group  
4
Contents  
Page  
Contents  
7.8  
7.8.1  
7.8.2  
Oscillator and Clock Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107  
Crystal Oscillator Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107  
Driving for External Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107  
7.8.2.1 Driving the SAB 80515/80535 from External Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108  
7.8.2.2 Driving the SAB 80C515/80C535 from External Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109  
7.9  
System Clock Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110  
8
Interrupt System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112  
Interrupt Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112  
Priority Level Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120  
How Interrupts are Handled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122  
External Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125  
Response Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126  
8.1  
8.2  
8.3  
8.4  
8.5  
9
9.1  
9.2  
9.2.1  
9.2.2  
9.2.3  
9.2.4  
9.3  
Instruction Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127  
Addressing Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127  
Introduction to the Instruction Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129  
Data Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129  
Arithmetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130  
Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132  
Control Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132  
Instruction Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134  
10  
Device Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214  
Semiconductor Group  
5
Introduction  
1
Introduction  
The SAB 80C515/80C535 is a new, powerful member of the Siemens SAB 8051 family of 8-bit  
microcontrollers. lt is designed in Siemens ACMOS technology and is functionally compatible with  
the SAB 80515/80535 devices designed in MYMOS technology.  
The ACMOS and the MYMOS versions 1) 2) are stand-alone, high-performance single-chip  
microcontrollers based on the SAB 8051/80C51 architecture. While maintaining all the  
SAB 80(C)51 operating characteristics, the SAB 80(C)515/80(C)5353) incorporate several  
enhancements which significantly increase design flexibility and overall system performance.  
The low-power properties of Siemens ACMOS technology allow applications where power  
consumption and dissipation are critical. Furthermore, the SAB 80C515/80C535 has two software-  
selectable modes of reduced activity for further power reduction: idle and power-down mode.  
The SAB 80(C)535 is identical to the SAB 80(C)515 except that it lacks the on-chip program  
memory. The SAB 80(C)515/80(C)535 is supplied in a 68-pin plastic leaded chip carrier package  
(P-LCC-68). In addition to the standard temperature range version (0 ° to + 70 °C) there are also  
versions for extended temperature ranges available (see data sheets).  
Functional Description  
The members of the SAB 80515 family of microcontrollers are:  
– SAB 80C515: Microcontroller, designed in Siemens ACMOS technology, with 8-Kbyte  
factory mask-programmable ROM  
– SAB 80C535: ROM-less version, identical to the SAB 80C515  
– SAB 80515:  
Microcontroller, designed in Siemens MYMOS technology, with 8-Kbyte  
factory mask-programmable ROM  
– SAB 80535:  
ROM-less version, identical to the SAB 80515  
– SAB 80515K: Special ROM-less version of the SAB 80515 with an additional interface for  
program memory accesses. An external ROM that is accessed via the  
interface substitutes the SAB 80515’s internal ROM.  
1
In this User’s Manual the term "ACMOS versions" is used to refer to both the SAB 80C515 and  
SAB 80C535.  
2
3
The term "MYMOS versions" stands for SAB 80535 and SAB 80515.  
The term "SAB 80(C)515" refers to the SAB 80515 and the SAB 80C515, unless otherwise  
noted.  
Semiconductor Group  
6
Introduction  
The SAB 80(C)515 features are:  
– 8 Kbyte on-chip program memory  
– 256 byte on-chip RAM  
– Six 8-bit parallel I/O ports  
– One input port for digital input 1)  
– Full-duplex serial port, 4 modes of operation, fixed or variabie baud rates  
– Three 16-bit timer/counters  
– 16-bit reload, compare, capture capability  
– A/D converter, 8 multiplexed analog inputs, programmable reference voltages  
– 16-bit watchdog timer  
– Power-down supply for 40 byte of RAM  
– Boolean processor  
– 256 directly addressable bits  
– 12 interrupt sources (7 external, 5 internal), 4 priority levels  
– Stack depth up to 256 byte  
– 1 µs instruction cycle at 12-MHz operation  
– 4 µs multiply and divide  
– External program and data memory expandable up to 64 Kbyte each  
– Compatible with standard SAB 8080/8085 peripherals and memories  
– Space-saving P-LCC-68 package  
For small-quantity applications and system development the SAB 80535 can be employed being  
the equivalent of an SAB 80515 without on-chip ROM.  
1
Additional feature of the ACMOS versions  
Semiconductor Group  
7
Introduction  
Figure 1-1 shows the logic symbol, figure 1-2 the block diagram of the SAB 80(C)515:  
Figure 1-1  
Logic Symbol  
Semiconductor Group  
8
Introduction  
Figure 1-2  
Block Diagram  
Semiconductor Group  
9
Fundamental Structure  
2
Fundamental Structure  
The SAB 80(C)515/80(C)535 is a totally 8051-compatible microcontroller while its peripheral  
performance has been increased significantly.  
Some of the various peripherals have been added to support the 8-bit core in case of stringent  
embedded control requirements without loosing compatibility to the 8051 architecture.  
Furthermore, the SAB 80(C)515/80(C)535 contains e. g. an additional 8-bit A/D converter, two  
times as much ROM and RAM as the 80(C)51 and an additional timer with compare/capture/reload  
facilities for all kinds of digital signal processing.  
Figure 2.1 shows a block diagram of the SAB 80(C)515/80(C)535.  
The SAB 80C515/80C535 combines the powerful architecture of the industry standard controller  
SAB 80515/80535 with the advantages of the ACMOS technology (e. g. power-saving modes). The  
differences between MYMOS and ACMOS components are explained in section 2.1.  
Readers who are familiar with the SAB 8051 may concentrate on chapters 2.1, 6, 7 and 8 where  
the differences between MYMOS and ACMOS components, the reset conditions, the peripherals  
and the interrupt system are described.  
For newcomers to the 8051 family of microcontrollers, the following section gives a general view of  
the basic characteristics of the SAB 80515/80535. The details of operation are described later in  
chapters 3 and 4.  
Semiconductor Group  
10  
Fundamental Structure  
Central Processing Unit  
The CPU is designed to operate on bits and bytes. The instructions, which consist of up to 3 bytes,  
are performed in one, two or four machine cycles. One machine cycle requires twelve oscillator  
cycles. The instruction set has extensive facilities for data transfer, logic and arithmetic instructions.  
The Boolean processor has its own full-featured and bit-based instructions within the instruction set.  
The SAB 80(C)515/80(C)535 uses five addressing modes: direct access, immediate, register,  
register indirect access, and for accessing the external data or program memory portions a base  
register plus index-register indirect addressing.  
Memory Organization  
The SAB 80C515, 80515 have an internal ROM of 8 Kbyte. The program memory can externally be  
expanded up to 64 Kbyte (see bus expansion control). The internal RAM consists of 256 bytes.  
Within this address space there are 128 bit-addressable locations and four register banks, each  
with 8 general purpose registers. In addition to the internal RAM there is a further 128-byte address  
space for the special function registers, which are described in sections to follow.  
Because of its Harvard architecture, the SAB 80(C)515/80(C)535 distinguishes between an  
external program memory portion (as mentioned above) and up to 64 Kbyte external data memory  
accessed by a set of special instructions.  
Bus Expansion Control  
The external bus interface of the SAB 80(C)515/80(C)535 consists of an 8-bit data bus (port 0), a  
16-bit address bus (port 0 and port 2) and five control lines. The address latch enable signal (ALE)  
is used to demultiplex address and data of port 0. The program memory is accessed by the program  
store enable signal (PSEN) twice a machine cycle. A separate external access line (EA) is used to  
inform the controller while executing out of the lower 8 Kbyte of the program memory, whether to  
operate out of the internal or external program memory. The read or write strobe (RD, WR) is used  
for accessing the external data memory.  
Peripheral Control  
All on-chip peripheral components - I/O ports, serial interface, timers, compare/capture registers,  
the interrupt controller and the A/D converter - are handled and controlled by the so-called special  
function registers. These registers constitute the easy-to-handle interface with the peripherals. This  
peripheral control concept, as implemented in the SAB 8051, provides the high flexibility for further  
expansion as done in the SAB 80(C)515/80(C)535.  
Moreover some of the special function registers, like accumulator, B-register, program status word  
(PSW), stack pointer (SP) and the data pointer (DPTR) are used by the CPU and maintain the  
machine status.  
Semiconductor Group  
11  
Fundamental Structure  
Figure 2-1  
Detailed Block Diagram  
Semiconductor Group  
12  
Fundamental Structure  
2.1  
Differences between MYMOS (SAB 80515/80535) and  
ACMOS (SAB 80C515/80C535) Versions  
There are some differences between MYMOS and ACMOS versions concerning:  
– Power Saving Modes  
– Special Function Register PCON  
– Port Driver Circuitry  
– A/D Converter Input Ports  
– A/D Converter Conversion Time  
– Oscillator and Clock Circuit  
VBB Pin  
2.1.1  
Power Saving Modes  
The SAB 80515/80535 has just the power-down mode, which allows retention of the on-chip RAM  
contents through a backup supply connected to the VPD pin.  
The SAB 80C515/80C535 additionally has the following features:  
– idle mode  
– the same power supply pin VCC for active, power-down and idle mode  
– an extra pin (PE) that allows enabling/disabling the power saving modes  
– starting of the power-saving modes by software via special function register PCON (Power  
Control Register)  
– protection against unintentional starting of the power-saving modes  
These items are described in detail in section 7.6.  
2.1.2  
Special Function Register PCON  
In the MYMOS version SAB 80515/80535 the SFR PCON (address 87 ) contains only bit 7  
H
(SMOD).  
In the ACMOS version SAB 80C515/80C535 there are additional bits used (see figure 2-2).  
The bits PDE, PDS and IDLE, IDLS select the power-down mode or idle mode, respectively, when  
the power saving modes are enabled by pin PE.  
Furthermore, register PCON of the ACMOS version contains two general-purpose flags. For  
example, the flag bits GF0 and GF1 can be used to indicate whether an interrupt has occurred  
during normal operation or during idle. Then an instruction that activates idle can also set one or  
both flag bits. When idle is terminated by an interrupt, the interrupt service routine can sample the  
flag bits.  
Semiconductor Group  
13  
Fundamental Structure  
2.1.3  
Port Driver Circuitries  
The port structures of the MYMOS and ACMOS versions are functionally compatible. For low power  
consumption the pullup arrangement is realized differently in both versions.  
Chapters 7.1.1.1, 7.1.1.2, 7.1.1.3 are dealing with the port structures in detail.  
2.1.4  
The A/D Converter Input Ports  
The analog input ports (AN0 to AN7) of the SAB 80515/80535 can only be used as analog inputs  
for the A/D converter.  
The analog input ports (P6.0 to P6.7) of the SAB 80C515/80C535 can be used either as input  
channels for the A/D converter or as digital inputs (see chapter 7.4)  
Figure 2-2  
Special Function Register PCON (Address 87 )  
H
87  
SMOD PDS  
IDLS  
5
4
GF1  
3
GF0  
2
PDE  
1
IDLE PCON  
0
H
7
6
These bits are available in the MYMOS version  
Symbol  
Position Function  
SMOD  
PCON.7 When set, the baud rate of the serial channel in mode 1, 2, 3 is doubled.  
PDS  
IDLS  
PCON.6 Power-down start bit. The instruction that sets the PDS flag bit is the last  
instruction before entering the power-down mode.  
PCON.5 Idle start bit. The instruction that sets the IDLS flag bit is the last instruction  
before entering the idle mode.  
PCON.4 Reserved  
GF1  
GF0  
PDE  
PCON.3 General purpose flag  
PCON.2 General purpose flag  
PCON.1 Power-down enable bit. When set, starting of the power-down mode is  
enabled.  
IDLE  
PCON.0 Idle mode enable bit. When set, starting of the idle mode is enabled.  
Semiconductor Group  
14  
Fundamental Structure  
2.1.5  
A/D Converter Timings  
See the corresponding data sheets for the specification of tL (load time), tS (sample time), tC  
(conversion time).  
2.1.6  
The Oscillator and Clock Circuits  
There is no difference between the MYMOS and ACMOS versions if they are driven from a crystal  
or a ceramic resonator.  
Please note that there is a difference between driving MYMOS and ACMOS components from  
external source. How to drive each device is described in chapter 7.8.2 and in each data sheet.  
2.1.7  
The VBB Pin  
The SAB 80515/80535 has an extra VBB pin connected to the device’s substrate. lt must be  
connected to VSS through a capacitor for proper operation of the A/D converter.  
The SAB 80C515/80C535 has no VBB pin. In ACMOS technology the substrate is directly connected  
to VCC ; therefore, the corresponding pin is used as an additional VCC pin.  
Semiconductor Group  
15  
Central Processing Unit  
3
Central Processing Unit  
General Description  
3.1  
The CPU (Central Processing Unit) of the SAB 80(C)515 consists of the instruction decoder, the  
arithmetic section and the program control section. Each program instruction is decoded by the  
instruction decoder. This unit generates the internal signals controlling the functions of the individual  
units within the CPU. They have an effect on the source and destination of data transfers, and  
control the ALU processing.  
The arithmetic section of the processor performs extensive data manipulation and is comprised of  
the Arithmetic/Logic Unit (ALU), an A register, B register and PSW register. The ALU accepts 8-bit  
data words from one or two sources and generates an 8-bit result under the control of the instruction  
decoder. The ALU performs the arithmetic operations add, subtract, multiply, divide, increment,  
decrement, BCD-decimal-add-adjust and compare, and the logic operations AND, OR, Exclusive  
OR, complement and rotate (right, left or swap nibble (left four)). Also included is a Boolean  
processor performing the bit operations of set, clear, complement, jump-if-not-set, jump-if-set-and-  
clear and move to/from carry. Between any addressable bit (or its complement) and the carry flag,  
it can perform the bit operations of logical AND or logical OR with the result returned to the carry  
flag. The A, B and PSW registers are described in section 4.4.  
The program control section controls the sequence in which the instructions stored in program  
memory are executed. The 16-bit program counter (PC) holds the address of the next instruction to  
be executed. The PC is manipulated by the control transfer instructions listed in the chapter  
"Instruction Set". The conditional branch logic enables internal and external events to the processor  
to cause a change in the program execution sequence.  
Semiconductor Group  
16  
Central Processing Unit  
3.2  
CPU Timing  
A machine cycle consists of 6 states (12 oscillator periods). Each state is divided into a phase 1  
half, during which the phase 1 clock is active, and a phase 2 half, during which the phase 2 clock is  
active. Thus, a machine cycle consists of 12 oscillator periods, numbered S1P1 (state 1, phase 1)  
through S6P2 (state 6, phase 2). Each state lasts for two oscillator periods. Typically, arithmetic and  
logical operations take place during phase 1 and internal register-to-register transfers take place  
during phase 2.  
The diagrams in figure 3-1 show the fetch/execute timing related to the internal states and phases.  
Since these internal clock signals are not user-accessible, the XTAL2 oscillator signals and the ALE  
(address latch enable) signal are shown for external reference. ALE is normally activated twice  
during each machine cycle: once during S1P2 and S2P1, and again during S4P2 and S5P1.  
Execution of a one-cycle instruction begins at S1P2, when the op-code is latched into the instruction  
register. lf it is a two-byte instruction, the second is read during S4 of the same machine cycle. lf it  
is a one-byte instruction, there is still a fetch at S4, but the byte read (which would be the next op-  
code) is ignored, and the program counter is not incremented. In any case, execution is completed  
at the end of S6P2.  
Figures 3-1 A) and B) show the timing of a 1-byte, 1-cycle instruction and for a 2-byte, 1-cycle  
instruction.  
Most SAB 80(C)515 instructions are executed in one cycle. MUL (multiply) and DIV (divide) are the  
only instructions that take more than two cycles to complete; they take four cycles. Normally two  
code bytes are fetched from the program memory during every machine cycle. The only exception  
to this is when a MOVX instruction is executed. MOVX is a one-byte, 2-cycle instruction that  
accesses external data memory. During a MOVX, the two fetches in the second cycle are skipped  
while the external data memory is being addressed and strobed. Figures 3-1 C) and D) show the  
timing for a normal 1-byte, 2-cycle instruction and for a MOVX instruction.  
Semiconductor Group  
17  
Central Processing Unit  
Figure 3-1  
Fetch/Execute Sequence  
Semiconductor Group  
18  
Memory Organization  
4
Memory Organization  
The SAB 80(C)515 CPU manipulates operands in the following four address spaces:  
– up to 64 Kbyte of program memory  
– up to 64 Kbyte of external data memory  
– 256 bytes of internal data memory  
– a 128-byte special function register area  
4.1  
Program Memory  
The program memory of the SAB 80(C)515 consists of an internal and an external memory portion  
(see figure 4-1). 8 Kbyte of program memory may reside on-chip (SAB 80C515/80515 only), while  
the SAB 80C535/80535 has no internal ROM. The program memory can be externally expanded  
up to 64 Kbyte. If the EA pin is held high, the SAB 80(C)515 executes out of the internal program  
memory unless the address exceeds 1FFF . Locations 2000 through 0FFFF are then fetched  
H
H
H
from the external memory. If the EA pin is held low, the SAB 80(C)515 fetches all instructions from  
the external program memory. Since the SAB 80C535/80535 has no internal program memory, pin  
EA must be tied low when using this device. In either case, the 16-bit program counter is the  
addressing mechanism.  
Locations 03 through 93 in the program memory are used by interrupt service routines.  
H
H
4.2  
Data Memory  
The data memory address space consists of an internal and an external memory portion.  
Internal Data Memory  
The internal data memory address space is divided into three physically separate and distinct  
blocks: the lower 128 bytes of RAM, the upper 128-byte RAM area, and the 128-byte special  
function register (SFR) area (see figure 4-2). Since the latter SFR area and the upper RAM area  
share the same address locations, they must be accessed through different addressing modes. The  
map in figure 4-2 and the following table show the addressing modes used for the different RAM/  
SFR spaces.  
Semiconductor Group  
19  
Memory Organization  
Address Space  
Locations  
Addressing Mode  
direct/indirect  
indirect  
Lower 128 bytes of RAM  
Upper 128 bytes of RAM  
Special function registers  
00 to 7F  
H
H
80 to 0FF  
H
H
H
80 to 0FF  
H
direct  
For details about the addressing modes see chapter 9.1.  
Figure 4-1  
Program Memory Address Space  
The lower 128 bytes of the internal RAM are again grouped in three address spaces  
(see figure 4-3):  
1) A general purpose register area occupies locations 0 through 1F (see also section 4.3).  
H
2) The next 16 bytes, location 20 through 2F , contain 128 directly addressable bits.  
H
H
Programming information: These bits can be referred to in two ways, both of which are  
acceptable for the ASM51. One way is to refer to their bit addresses, i.e. 0 to 7F . The other  
H
way is by referencing to bytes 20 to 2F . Thus bits 0 to 7 can also be referred to as bits 20.0  
H
H
to 20.7, and bits 08 and 0F are the same as 21.0 to 21.7 and so on. Each of the 16 bytes in  
H
H
this segment may also be addressed as a byte.)  
3) Locations 30 to 7F can be used as a scratch pad area.  
H
H
Semiconductor Group  
20  
Memory Organization  
Using the Stack Pointer (SP) - a special function register described in section 4.4 - the stack can be  
located anywhere in the whole internal data memory address space. The stack depth is limited only  
by the internal RAM available (256 byte maximum). However, the user has to take care that the  
stack is not overwritten by other data, and vice versa.  
External Data Memory  
Figure 4-2 and 4-3 contain memory maps which illustrate the internal/external data memory. To  
address data memory external to the chip, the "MOVX" instructions in combination with the 16-bit  
datapointer or an 8-bit general purpose register are used. Refer to chapter 9 (Instruction Set) or 5  
(External Bus Interface) for detailed descriptions of these operations. A maximum of 64 Kbytes of  
external data memory can be accessed by instructions using 16-bit address.  
Figure 4-2  
Data Memory / SFR Address Space  
Semiconductor Group  
21  
Memory Organization  
Figure 4-3  
Mapping of the Lower Portion of the Internal Data Memory  
Semiconductor Group  
22  
Memory Organization  
4.3  
General Purpose Register  
The lower 32 locations of the internal RAM are assigned to four banks with eight general purpose  
register (GPRs) each. Only one of these banks may be enabled at a time. Two bits in the program  
status word, PSW.3 and PSW.4, select the active register bank (see description of the PSW). This  
allows fast context switching, which is useful when entering subroutines or interrupt service  
routines. ASM51 and the device SAB 80(C)515 default to register bank 0.  
The 8 general purpose registers of the selected register bank may be accessed by register  
addressing. With register addressing the instruction op code indicates which register is to be used.  
For indirect accessing R0 and R1 are used as pointer or index register to address internal or  
external memory (e.g. MOV @R0).  
Reset initializes the stack pointer to location 07 and increments it once to start from location 08  
H
H
which is also the first register (R0) of register bank 1. Thus, if one is going to use more than one  
register bank, the SP should be initiated to a different location of the RAM which is not used for data  
storage.  
4.4  
Special Function Registers  
The Special Function Register (SFR) area has two important functions. Firstly, all CPU register  
except the program counter and the four register banks reside here. The CPU registers are the  
arithmetic registers like A, B, PSW and pointers like SP, DPH and DPL.  
Secondly, a number of registers constitute the interface between the CPU and all on-chip  
peripherals. That means, all control and data transfers from and to the peripherals use this register  
interface exclusively.  
The special function register area is located in the address space above the internal RAM from  
addresses 80 to FF . All 41 special function registers of the SAB 80(C)515 reside here.  
H
H
Fifteen SFRs, that are located on addresses dividable by eight, are bit-addressable, thus allowing  
128 bit-addressable locations within the SFR area.  
Since the SFR area is memory mapped, access to the special function registers is as easy as with  
internal RAM, and they may be processed with most instructions. In addition, if the special functions  
are not used, some of them may be used as general scratch pad registers. Note, however, all SFRs  
can be accessed by direct addressing only.  
The special function registers are listed in table 4-1. Bit- and byte-addressable special function  
registers are marked with an asterisk at the symbol name.  
Semiconductor Group  
23  
Memory Organization  
Table 4-1  
Special Function Registers  
Symbol  
Name  
Address  
*
P0  
SP  
DPL  
DPH  
Port 0  
Stack pointer  
Data pointer, low byte  
Data pointer, high byte  
80  
H
81  
H
82  
H
83  
H
PCON Power control register  
TCON  
Timer control register  
TMOD Timer mode register  
87  
H
*
88  
H
89  
H
TL0  
TL1  
TH0  
TH1  
P1  
Timer 0, low byte  
Timer 1, low byte  
Timer 0, high byte  
Timer 1, high byte  
Port 1  
8A  
H
8B  
H
8C  
H
8D  
H
*
*
90  
H
SCON Serial channel control register  
98  
H
SBUF  
P2  
IEN0  
IP0  
P3  
IEN1  
IP1  
Serial channel buffer register  
Port 2  
Interrupt enable register 0  
Interrupt priority register 0  
Port 3  
99  
H
*
*
0A0  
H
0A8  
H
0A9  
H
*
*
0B0  
H
Interrupt enable register 1  
Interrupt priority register 1  
0B8  
H
0B9  
H
*
IRCON Interrupt request control register  
0C0  
H
CCEN  
CCL1  
CCH1  
CCL2  
CCH2  
CCL3  
CCH3  
Compare/capture enable register  
0C1  
H
Compare/capture register 1, low byte  
Compare/capture register 1, high byte  
Compare/capture register 2, low byte  
Compare/capture register 2, high byte  
Compare/capture register 3, low byte  
Compare/capture register 3, high byte  
0C2  
H
0C3  
H
0C4  
H
0C5  
H
0C6  
H
0C7  
H
*
T2CON Timer 2 control register  
0C8  
H
CRCL  
CRCH  
TL2  
TH2  
PSW  
Compare/reload/capture register, low byte  
Compare/reload/capture register, high byte  
Timer 2, low byte  
Timer 2, high byte  
Program status word register  
0CA  
H
0CB  
H
0CC  
H
0CD  
H
*
*
0D0  
H
ADCON A/D converter control register  
ADDAT A/D converter data register  
0D8  
H
0D9  
H
DAPR  
P6  
ACC  
P4  
B
P5  
D/A converter program register  
Port 6  
Accumulator  
Port 4  
B register  
Port 5  
0DA  
H
1)  
0DB  
H
*
*
*
*
0E0  
H
0E8  
H
0F0  
H
0F8  
H
The SFR’s marked with an asterisk (*) are bit- and byte-addressable.  
1) Additional feature of the ACMOS versions  
Semiconductor Group  
24  
Memory Organization  
The following paragraphs give a general overview of the special function register and refer to  
sections where a more detailed description can be found.  
Accumulator, SFR Address 0E0  
H
ACC is the symbol for the accumulator register. The mnemonics for accumulator-specific  
instructions, however, refer to the accumulator simply as A.  
Figure 4-4  
Program Status Word Register (PSW), SFR Address 0D0  
H
0D7  
0D6  
0D5  
0D4  
0D3  
0D2  
0D1  
0D0  
P
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
0D0  
CY  
AC  
F0  
RS1  
RS0  
OV  
F1  
PSW  
H
The PSW register contains program status information.  
Bit  
CY  
AC  
F0  
Function  
Carry flag  
Auxiliary carry flag (for BCD operations)  
General purpose user flag 0  
RS1  
RS0  
Register bank select control bits  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Bank 0 selected, data address 00 - 07  
H
H
H
Bank 1 selected, data address 08 - 0F  
H
Bank 2 selected, data address 10 - 17  
Bank 3 selected, data address 18 - 1F7  
H
H
H
OV  
F1  
P
Overflow flag  
General purpose user flag  
Parity flag. Set/cleared by hardware each instruction cycle to indicate an odd/  
even number of "one" bits in the accumulator, i.e. even parity.  
B Register, SPF Address 0F0  
H
The B register is used during multiply and divide and serves as both source and destination. For  
other instructions it can be treated as another scratch pad register.  
Stack Pointer, SFR Address 081  
H
The Stack Pointer (SP) register is 8 bits wide. It is incriminated before data is stored during PUSH  
and CALL executions and decremented after data is popped during a POP and RET (RETI)  
execution, i.e. it always points to the last valid stack byte. While the stack may reside anywhere in  
on-chip RAM, the stack pointer is initialized to 07 after a reset. This causes the stack to begin at  
H
location 08 above register bank zero. The SP can be read or written under software control.  
H
Semiconductor Group  
25  
Memory Organization  
Datapointer, SFR Address 082 and 083  
H
H
The 16-bit Datapointer (DPTR) register is a concatenation of registers DPH (data pointer’s high  
order byte) and DPL (data pointer’s low order byte). The data pointer is used in register-indirect  
addressing to move program memory constants and external data memory variables, as well as to  
branch within the 64 Kbyte program memory address space.  
Ports 0 to 5  
P0 to P5 are the SFR latches to port 0 to 5, respectively. The port SFRs 0 to 5 are bit-addressable.  
Ports 0 to 5 are 8-bit I/O ports (that is in total 48 I/O lines) which may be used as general purpose  
ports and which provide alternate output functions dedicated to the on-chip peripherals of the SAB  
80(C)515.  
Port 6 (AN0 to AN7)  
In the MYMOS versions, the analog input lines AN0 to AN7 can only be used as inputs for the A/D  
converter.  
In the ACMCS versions these lines may also be used as digital inputs. In this case they are  
addressed as an additional input port (port 6) via special function register P6 (0DB ). Since port 6  
H
has no internal latch, the contents of SFR P6 only depends on the levels applied to the input lines.  
For details about this port please refer to section 7.1 (Parallel I/O).  
Peripheral Control, Data and Status Registers  
Most of the special function registers are used as control, status, and data registers to handle the  
on-chip peripherals.  
In the special function register table the register names are organized in groups and each of these  
groups refer to one peripheral unit. More details on how to program these registers are given in the  
descriptions of the following peripheral units:  
Unit  
Symbol  
Section  
7.1  
Ports  
Serial Channel  
Timer 0/1  
7.2  
7.3  
A/D-Converter  
Timer 2 with Comp/Capt/Reload  
Power Saving Modes  
Watchdog Timer  
Interrupt System  
ADC  
CCU  
7.4  
7.5  
7.6  
WDT  
7.7  
8
Semiconductor Group  
26  
External Bus Interface  
5
External Bus Interface  
The SAB 80(C)515 allows for external memory expansion. To accomplish this, the external bus  
interface common to most 8051-based controllers is employed.  
5.1  
Accessing External Memory  
lt is possible to distinguish between accesses to external program memory and external data  
memory or other peripheral components respectively. This distinction is made by hardware:  
accesses to external program memory use the signal PSEN (program store enable) as a read  
strobe. Accesses to external data memory use RD and WR to strobe the memory (alternate  
functions of P3.7 and P3.6, see section 7.1.). Port 0 and port 2 (with exceptions) are used to provide  
data and address signals. In this section only the port 0 and port 2 functions relevant to external  
memory accesses are described (for further details see chapter 7.1).  
Fetches from external program memory always use a 16-bit address. Accesses to external data  
memory can use either a 16-bit address (MOVX @DPTR) or an 8-bit address (MOVX @Ri).  
Role of P0 and P2 as Data/Address Bus  
When used for accessing external memory, port 0 provides the data byte time-multiplexed with the  
low byte of the address. In this state, port 0 is disconnected from its own port latch, and the address/  
data signal drives both FETs in the port 0 output buffers. Thus, in this application, the port 0 pins  
are not open-drain outputs and do not require external pullup resistors.  
During any access to external memory, the CPU writes 0FF to the port 0 latch (the special function  
H
register), thus obliterating whatever information the port 0 SFR may have been holding.  
Whenever a 16-bit address is used, the high byte of the address comes out on port 2, where it is  
held for the duration of the read or write cycle. During this time, the port 2 lines are disconnected  
from the port 2 latch (the special function register).  
Thus the port 2 latch does not have to contain 1 s, and the contents of the port 2 SFR are not  
modified.  
lf an 8-bit address is used (MOVX @Ri), the contents of the port 2 SFR remain at the port 2 pins  
throughout the external memory cycle. This will facilitate paging. lt should be noted that, if a port 2  
pin outputs an address bit that is a 1, strong pullups will be used for the entire read/write cycle and  
not only for two oscillator periods.  
Semiconductor Group  
27  
External Bus Interface  
Timing  
The timing of the external bus interface, in particular the relationship between the control signals  
ALE, PSEN, RD and information on port 0 and port 2, is illustrated in figure 5-1 a) and b).  
Data memory:  
in a write cycle, the data byte to be written appears on port 0 just before WR is  
activated, and remains there until after WR is deactivated. In a read cycle, the  
incoming byte is accepted at port 0 before the read strobe is deactivated.  
Program memory: signal PSEN functions as a read strobe. For further information see section 5.2.  
External Program Memory Access  
The external program memory is accessed under two conditions:  
– whenever signal EA is active; or  
– whenever the program counter (PC) contains a number that is larger than 01FFF .  
H
This requires the ROM-less versions SAB 80C535/80535 to have EA wired low to allow the lower  
8 K program bytes to be fetched from external memory.  
When the CPU is executing out of external program memory, all 8 bits of port 2 are dedicated to an  
output function and may not be used for general-purpose I/O. The contents of the port 2 SFR  
however is not affected. During external program memory fetches port 2 lines output the high byte  
of the PC, and during accesses to external data memory they output either DPH or the port 2 SFR  
(depending on whether the external data memory access is a MOVX @DPTR or a MOVX @Ri).  
Since the SAB 80C535/80535 has no internal program memory, accesses to program memory are  
always external, and port 2 is at all times dedicated to output the high-order address byte. This  
means that port 0 and port 2 of the SAB 80C535/80535 can never be used as general-purpose I/O.  
This also applies to the SAB 80C515/80515 when it is operated with only an external program  
memory.  
Semiconductor Group  
28  
External Bus Interface  
5.2  
PSEN, Program Store Enable  
The read strobe for external fetches is PSEN. PSEN is not activated for internal fetches. When the  
CPU is accessing external program memory, PSEN is activated twice every cycle (except during a  
MOVX instruction) no matter whether or not the byte fetched is actually needed for the current  
instruction. When PSEN is activated its timing is not the same as for RD. A complete RD cycle,  
including activation and deactivation of ALE and RD, takes 12 oscillator periods. A complete PSEN  
cycle, including activation and deactivation of ALE and PSEN takes 6 oscillator periods. The  
execution sequence for these two types of read cycles is shown in figure 5-1 a) and b).  
5.3  
ALE, Address Latch Enable  
The main function of ALE is to provide a properly timed signal to latch the low byte of an address  
from P0 into an external latch during fetches from external memory. The address byte is valid at the  
negative transition of ALE. For that purpose, ALE is activated twice every machine cycle. This  
activation takes place even it the cycle involves no external fetch. The only time no ALE pulse  
comes out is during an access to external data memory when RD/WR signals are active. The first  
ALE of the second cycle of a MOVX instruction is missing (see figure 5-1b) ). Consequently, in any  
system that does not use data memory, ALE is activated at a constant rate of 1/6 of the oscillator  
frequency and can be used for external clocking or timing purposes.  
5.4  
Overlapping External Data and Program Memory Spaces  
In some applications it is desirable to execute a program from the same physical memory that is  
used for storing data. In the SAB 80(C)515, the external program and data memory spaces can be  
combined by AND-ing PSEN and RD. A positive logic AND of these two signals produces an active  
low read strobe that can be used for the combined physical memory. Since the PSEN cycle is faster  
than the RD cycle, the external memory needs to be fast enough to adapt to the PSEN cycle.  
Semiconductor Group  
29  
External Bus Interface  
Figure 5-1 a) and b)  
External Program Memory Execution  
Semiconductor Group  
30  
System Reset  
6
System Reset  
6.1  
6.1.1  
Hardware Reset and Power-Up Reset  
Reset Function and Circuitries  
The hardware reset function incorporated in the SAB 80(C)515 allows for an easy automatic start-  
up at a minimum of additional hardware and forces the controller to a predefined default state. The  
hardware reset function can also be used during normal operation in order to restart the device. This  
is particularly done when the power-down mode (see section 7.6) is to be terminated.  
In addition to the hardware reset, which is applied externally to the SAB 80(C)515, there is also the  
possibility of an internal hardware reset. This internal reset will be initiated by the watchdog timer  
(section 7.7).  
The reset input is an active low input at pin 10 (RESET). An internal Schmitt trigger is used at the  
input for noise rejection. Since the reset is synchronized internally, the RESET pin must be held low  
for at least two machine cycles (24 oscillator periods) while the oscillator is running. With the  
oscillator running the internal reset is executed during the second machine cycle in which RESET  
is low and is repeated every cycle until RESET goes high again.  
During reset, pins ALE and PSEN are configured as inputs and should not be stimulated externally.  
(An external stimulation at these lines during reset activates several test modes which are reserved  
for test purposes. This in turn may cause unpredictable output operations at several port pins).  
A pullup resistor is internally connected to VCC to allow a power-up reset with an external capacitor  
only. An automatic reset can be obtained when VCC is applied by connecting the reset pin to VSS via  
a capacitor as shown in figure 6-1 a) and c). After VCC has been turned on the capacitor must hold  
the voltage level at the reset pin for a specified time below the upper threshold of the Schmitt trigger  
to effect a complete reset.  
The time required is the oscillator start-up time plus 2 machine cycles, which, under normal  
conditions, must be at least 10 - 20 ms for a crystal oscillator. This requirement is usually met using  
a capacitor of 4.7 to 10 microfarad. The same considerations apply if the reset signal is generated  
externally (figure 6-1 b) ). In each case it must be assured that the oscillator has started up properly  
and that at least two machine cycles have passed before the reset signal goes inactive.  
Semiconductor Group  
31  
System Reset  
Figure 6-1 a) - c)  
Reset Circuitries  
A correct reset leaves the processor in a defined state. The program execution starts at location  
0000 . The default values of the special function registers (SFR) during and after reset are listed  
H
in table 6-1. After reset is internally accomplished the contents of the port latches of port 0 to 5 is  
0FF . This leaves port 0 floating, since it is an open drain port when not used as data/address bus.  
H
All other I/O port lines (ports 1 through 5) output a one (1).  
In the MYMOS versions, the analog input lines AN0 to AN7 can only be used as inputs.  
In the ACMOS versions these lines may also be used as digital inputs. In this case they are  
addressed as an additional input port (port 6) via special function register P6 (0DB ) Since port 6  
H
has no internal latch, the contents of SFR P6 only depends on the levels applied to the input lines.  
For details about this port please refer to section 7.1 (Parallel I/O).  
The contents of the internal RAM of the SAB 80(C)515 is not affected by a reset. After power-up the  
contents is undefined, while it remains unchanged during a reset if the power supply is not turned  
off.  
Semiconductor Group  
32  
System Reset  
Table 6-1  
Register Contents after Reset  
Register  
Contents Register  
Contents  
P0 - P5  
DPTR  
TCON  
TL0, TH0  
TL2, TH2  
IEN0, IEN1  
IRCON  
0FF SP  
H
07  
H
0000 PCON  
H
000X 0000B  
00 TMOD  
H
00  
00  
H
00  
H
H
00 TL1, TH1  
H
00 SCON  
H
00 SBUF  
H
undefined  
X000 0000B  
XX00 0000B  
00 IP0  
H
IP1  
CCL1, CCH1  
CCL3, CCH3  
T2CON  
ADCON  
DAPR  
00 CCEN  
00  
H
H
00 CCL2, CCH2  
H
00  
H
00 CRCL, CRCH  
H
00  
H
00X0 0000B PSW  
00  
H
00 ADDAT  
00  
H
H
B
PC  
00 ACC  
H
00  
H
0000 Watchdog  
H
0000  
H
Semiconductor Group  
33  
System Reset  
6.1.2  
Hardware Reset Timing  
This section describes the timing of the hardware reset signal.  
The input pin RESET is sampled once during each machine cycle. This happens in state 5 phase 2.  
Thus, the external reset signal is synchronized to the internal CPU timing. When the reset is found  
active (low level at pin 10) the internal reset procedure is started. lt needs two complete machine  
cycles to put the complete device to its correct reset state. i.e. all special function registers contain  
their default values, the port latches contain 1’s etc. Note that this reset procedure is not performed  
if there is no clock available at the device. The RESET signal must be active for at least two machine  
cycles; after this time the SAB 80(C)515 remains in its reset state as long as the signal is active.  
When the signal goes inactive this transition is recognized in the following state 5 phase 2 of the  
machine cycle. Then the processor starts its address output (when configured for external ROM) in  
the following state 5 phase 1. One phase later (state 5 phase 2) the first falling edge at pin ALE  
occurs. Figure 6-2 shows this timing for a configuration with EA = 0 (external program memory).  
Thus, between the release of the RESET signal and the first falling edge at ALE there is a time  
period of at least one machine cycle but less than two machine cycles.  
One Machine Cycle  
S4  
S5  
S6  
S1  
S2  
S3  
S4  
S5  
S6  
S1  
S2  
S3  
S4  
S5  
S6  
S1  
S2  
P1 P2  
RESET  
P0  
PCL  
OUT  
Inst. PCL  
IN OUT  
PCH  
OUT  
PCH  
OUT  
P2  
ALE  
MCT01879  
Figure 6-2  
CPU Timing after RESET  
Semiconductor Group  
34  
On-Chip Peripheral Components  
7
On-Chip Peripheral Components  
This chapter gives detailed information about all on-chip peripherals of the SAB 80(C)515 except  
for the integrated interrupt controller, which is described separately in chapter 8. Sections 7.1 and  
7.2 are associated with the general parallel and serial I/O facilities while the remaining sections  
describe the miscellaneous functions such as the timers, serial interface, A/D converter, power  
saving modes, watchdog timer, oscillator and clock circuitries, and system clock output.  
7.1  
Parallel I/O  
7.1.1  
Port Structures  
Digital I/O  
The SAB 80(C)515 allows for digital I/O on 48 lines grouped into 6 bidirectional 8-bit ports. Each  
port bit consists of a latch, an output driver and an input buffer. Read and write accesses to the I/O  
ports P0 through P5 are performed via their corresponding special function registers P0 to P5.  
The output drivers of port 0 and 2 and the input buffers of port 0 are also used for accessing external  
memory. In this application, port 0 outputs the low byte of the external memory address, time-  
multiplexed with the byte being written or read. Port 2 outputs the high byte of the external memory  
address when the address is 16 bits wide. Otherwise, the port 2 pins continue emitting the P2 SFR  
contents (see also chapter 7.1.2 and chapter 5 for more details about the external bus interface).  
Digital/Analog Input Ports  
The analog input lines AN0 to AN7 of the MYMOS versions can only be used as analog inputs.  
In the ACMOS versions these lines may also be used as digital inputs. In this case they are  
addressed as an additional input port (port 6) via special function register P6 (0DB ). Since port 6  
H
has no internal latch, the contents of SFR P6 only depends on the levels applied to the input lines.  
When used as analog input the required analog channel is selected by a three-bit field in SFR  
ADCON , as described in section 7.4. Of course, it makes no sense to output a value to these input-  
only ports by writing to the SFR P6 or P8; this will have no effect.  
Semiconductor Group  
35  
On-Chip Peripheral Components  
lf a digital value is to be read, the voltage levels are to be held within the input voltage specifications  
(VIL/VIH). Since P6 is not a bit-addressable register, all input lines of P6 are read at the same time  
by byte instructions.  
Nevertheless, it is possible to use port 6 simultaneously for analog and digital input. However, care  
must be taken that all bits of P6 are masked which have an undetermined value caused by their  
analog function .  
In order to guarantee a high-quality A/D conversion, digital input lines of port 6 should not toggle  
while a neighbouring port pin is executing an A/D conversion. This could produce crosstalk to the  
analog signal.  
7.1.1.1 Digital I/O Port Circuitry (MYMOS/ACMOS)  
Figure 7-1 shows a functional diagram of a typical bit latch and I/O buffer, which is the core of each  
of the 6 I/O-ports. The bit latch (one bit in the port’s SFR) is represented as a type-D flip-flop, which  
will clock in a value from the internal bus in response to a "write-to-latch" signal from the CPU. The  
Q output of the flip-flop is placed on the internal bus in response to a "read-latch" signal from the  
CPU. The level of the port pin itself is placed on the internal bus in response to a "read-pin" signal  
from the CPU. Some instructions that read from a port (i.e. from the corresponding port SFR P0 to  
P5) activate the "read-latch" signal, while others activate the "read-pin" signal (see section 7.1.4.3).  
Figure 7-1  
Basic Structure of a Port Circuitry  
Semiconductor Group  
36  
On-Chip Peripheral Components  
Port 1 through 5 output drivers have internal pullup FET’s (see figure 7-2). Each I/O line can be  
used independently as an input or output. To be used as an input, the port bit must contain a one  
(1) (that means for figure 7-2: Q = 0), which turns off the output driver FET n1. Then, for ports 1  
through 5, the pin is pulled high by the internal pullups, but can be pulled low by an external source.  
When externally pulled low the port pins source current (IIL or ITL). For this reason these ports are  
sometimes called "quasi-bidirectional".  
Figure 7-2  
Basic Output Driver Circuit of Ports 1 through 5  
In fact, the pullups mentioned before and included in figure 7-2 are pullup arrangements as shown  
in figure 7-3. These pullup arrangements are realized differently in the MYMOS and ACMOS  
versions. In the next two sections both versions are discussed separately.  
Semiconductor Group  
37  
On-Chip Peripheral Components  
Figure 7-3  
Output Driver Circuits of Ports 1 through 5  
Semiconductor Group  
38  
On-Chip Peripheral Components  
7.1.1.2 MYMOS Port Driver Circuitry  
The output driver circuitry of the MYMOS version (figure 7-3) consists of two pullup FETs (pullup  
arrangements) and one pulldown FET:  
– The transistor n1 is a very strong pullup transistor which is only activated for two oscillator  
periods, if a 0-to-1 transition is executed by this port bit. Transistor n1 is capable of driving  
high currents.  
– The transistor n2 is a weak pullup transistor, which is always switched on. When the pin is  
pulled down (e.g. when the port is used as input), it sources a low current. This value can be  
found as the parameter IIL in the DC characteristics.  
– The transistor n3 is a very strong pull-down transistor which is switched on when a "0" is  
programmed to the corresponding port latch. Transistor n3 is capable of sinking high currents  
(IOL in the DC characteristics).  
A short circuit to VCC must be avoided if the transistor is turned on because the high current  
might destroy the FET.  
7.1.1.3 ACMOS Port Driver Circuitry  
The output driver circuitry of the ACMOS version (figure 7-3) is realized by three pullup FETs  
(pullup arrangement) and one pulldown FET:  
– The pulldown FET n1 is of n-channel type. lt is a very strong driver transistor which is capable  
of sinking high currents (IOL); it is only activated if a "0" is programmed to the port pin. A short  
circuit to VCC must be avoided if the transistor is turned on, since the high current might destroy  
the FET.  
– The pullup FET p1 is of p-channel type. lt is activated for two oscillator periods (S1P1 and  
S1P2) if a 0-to-1 transition is programmed to the port pin, i.e. a "1" is programmed to the port  
latch which contained a "0". The extra pullup can drive a similar current as the pulldown  
FET n1. This provides a fast transition of the logic levels at the pin.  
– The pullup FET p2 is of p-channel type. lt is always activated when a "1" is in the port latch,  
thus providing the logic high output level. This pullup FET sources a much lower current than  
p1; therefore the pin may also be tied to ground, e.g. when used as input with logic low input  
level.  
– The pullup FET p3 is of p-channel type. lt is only activated if the voltage at the port pin is  
higher than approximately 1.0 to 1.5 V. This provides an additional pullup current if a logic high  
level is to be output at the pin (and the voltage is not forced lower than approximately 1.0 to  
1.5 V). However, this transistor is turned off if the pin is driven to a logic low level, e.g. when  
used as input. In this configuration only the weak pullup FET p2 is active, which sources the  
current IIL. lf, in addition, the pullup FET p3 is activated, a higher current can be sourced (ITL).  
Thus, an additional power consumption can be avoided if port pins are used as inputs with a  
low level applied. However, the driving cabability is stronger if a logic high level is output.  
The described activating and deactivating of the four different transistors translates into four states  
the pins can be:  
input low state (IL), p2 active only  
input high state (IH) = steady output high state (SOH) p2 and p3 active  
forced output high state (FOH), p1, p2 and p3 active  
output low state (OL), n1 active  
Semiconductor Group  
39  
On-Chip Peripheral Components  
If a pin is used as input and a low level is applied, it will be in IL state, if a high level is applied, it will  
switch to IH state.  
If the latch is loaded with "0", the pin will be in OL state.  
If the latch holds a "0" and is loaded with "1", the pin will enter FOH state for two cycles and then  
switch to SOH state. If the latch holds a "1" and is reloaded with a "1" no state change will occur.  
At the beginning of power-on reset the pins will be in IL state (latch is set to "1", voltage level on pin  
is below of the trip point of p3). Depending on the voltage level and load applied to the pin, it will  
remain in this state or will switch to IH (=SOH) state.  
If it is used as output, the weak pull-up p2 will pull the voltage level at the pin above p3’s trip point  
after some time and p3 will turn on and provide a strong "1". Note, however, that if the load exceeds  
the drive capability of p2 (IIL), the pin might remain in the IL state and provide a week "1" until the  
first 0-to-1 transition on the latch occurs. Until this the output level might stay below the trip point of  
the external circuitry.  
The same is true if a pin is used as bidirectional line and the external circuitry is switched from  
outpout to input when the pin is held at "0" and the load then exceeds the p2 drive capabilities.  
If the load exceeds IIL the pin can be forced to "1" by writing a "0" followed by a "1" to the port pin.  
Port 0, in contrast to ports 1 through 5, is considered as "true" bidirectional, because the port 0 pins  
float when configured as inputs. Thus, this port differs in not having internal pullups. The pullup FET  
in the P0 output driver (see figure 7-4 a) ) is used only when the port is emitting 1 s during the  
external memory accesses. Otherwise, the pullup is always off. Consequently, P0 lines that are  
used as output port lines are open drain lines. Writing a "1" to the port latch leaves both output FETs  
off and the pin floats. In that condition it can be used as high-impedance input. lf port 0 is configured  
as general I/O port and has to emit logic high level (1), external pullups are required.  
Figure 7-4 a)  
Port 0 Circuitry  
Semiconductor Group  
40  
On-Chip Peripheral Components  
7.1.2  
Port 0 and Port 2 Used as Address/Data Bus  
As shown in figures 7-4 a) and 7-4 b), the output drivers of ports 0 and 2 can be switched to an  
internal address or address/data bus for use in external memory accesses. In this application they  
cannot be used as general purpose I/O, even if not all address lines are used externally. The  
switching is done by an internal control signal dependent on the input level at the EA pin and/or the  
contents of the program counter. lf the ports are configured as an address/data bus, the port latches  
are disconnected from the driver circuit. During this time, the P2 SFR remains unchanged while the  
P0 SFR has 1’s written to it. Being an address/data bus, port 0 uses a pullup FET as shown in figure  
7-4 a). When a 16-bit address is used, port 2 uses the additional strong pullups p1 to emit 1’s for  
the entire external memory cycle instead of the weak ones (p2 and p3) used during normal port  
activity.  
Figure 7-4 b)  
Port 2 Circuitry  
Semiconductor Group  
41  
On-Chip Peripheral Components  
7.1.3  
Alternate Functions  
Several pins of ports 1 and 3 are multifunctional. They are port pins and also serve to implement  
special features as listed in table 7-1.  
Table 7-1  
Port  
Pin  
Alternate Function  
P1.0  
P1.1  
P1.2  
P1.3  
P1.4  
P1.5  
P1.6  
P1.7  
P3.0  
INT3/CC0  
INT4/CC1  
INT5/CC2  
INT6/CC3  
INT2  
T2EX  
CLKOUT  
T2  
Ext. interrupt 3 input, compare 0 output, capture 0 input  
Ext. interrupt 4 input, compare 1 output, capture 1 input  
Ext. interrupt 5 input, compare 2 output, capture 2 input  
Ext. interrupt 6 input, compare 3 output, capture 3 input  
Ext. interrupt 2 input  
Timer 2 external reload trigger input  
System clock output  
Timer 2 external reload trigger input  
Serial port’s receiver data input (asynchronous) or data  
input/output (synchronous)  
RXD  
P3.1  
TXD  
Serial port’s transmitter data output (asynchronous) or  
clock output (synchronous)  
P3.2  
P3.3  
P3.4  
P3.5  
P3.6  
P3.7  
INT0  
INT1  
T0  
T1  
WR  
RD  
External interrupt 0 input, timer 0 gate control  
External interrupt 1 input, timer 1 gate control  
Timer 0 external counter input  
Timer 1 external counter input  
External data memory write strobe  
External data memory read strobe  
Semiconductor Group  
42  
On-Chip Peripheral Components  
Figure 7-5 shows a functional diagram of a port latch with alternate function. To pass the alternate  
function to the output pin and vice versa, however, the gate between the latch and driver circuit must  
be open. Thus, to use the alternate input or output functions, the corresponding bit latch in the port  
SFR has to contain a one (1); otherwise the pull-down FET is on and the port pin is stuck at 0. (This  
does not apply to ports 1.0 to 1.3 when operated in compare output mode; refer to section 7.5.2 for  
details). After reset all port latches contain ones (1).  
Figure 7-5  
Port 1 and 3  
Semiconductor Group  
43  
On-Chip Peripheral Components  
7.1.4  
Port Handling  
7.1.4.1 Port Timing  
When executing an instruction that changes the value of a port latch, the new value arrives at the  
latch during S6P2 of the final cycle of the instruction. However, port latches are only sampled by  
their output buffers during phase 1 of any clock period (during phase 2 the output buffer holds the  
value it noticed during the previous phase 1). Consequently, the new value in the port latch will not  
appear at the output pin until the next phase 1, which will be at S1P1 of the next machine cycle.  
When an instruction reads a value from a port pin (e.g. MOV A, P1) the port pin is actually sampled  
in state 5 phase 1 or phase 2 depending on port and alternate functions. Figure 7-6 illustrates this  
port timing. lt must be noted that this mechanism of sampling once per machine cycle is also used  
if a port pin is to detect an "edge", e.g. when used as counter input. In this case an "edge" is  
detected when the sampled value differs from the value that was sampled the cycle before.  
Therefore, there must be met certain requirements on the pulse length of signals in order to avoid  
signal "edges" not being detected. The minimum time period of high and low level is one machine  
cycle, which guarantees that this logic level is noticed by the port at least once.  
Figure 7-6  
Port Timing  
Semiconductor Group  
44  
On-Chip Peripheral Components  
7.1.4.2 Port Loading and Interfacing  
The output buffers of ports 1 through 5 can drive TTL inputs directly. The maximum port load which  
still guarantees correct logic output levels can belooked up in the DC characteristics in the Data  
Sheet of the SAB 80(C)515. The corresponding parameters are VOL and VOH.  
The same applies to port 0 output buffers. They do, however, require external pullups to drive  
floating inputs, except when being used as the address/data bus.  
When used as inputs it must be noted that the ports 1 through 5 are not floating but have internal  
pullup transistors. The driving devices must be capable of sinking a sufficient current if a logic low  
level shall be applied to the port pin (the parameters ITL and IIL in the DC characteristics specify  
these currents). Port 0 as well as the input only ports 6 of the ACMOS versions have floating inputs  
when used for digital input.  
7.1.4.3 Read-Modify-Write Feature of Ports 0 through 5  
Some port-reading instructions read the latch and others read the pin (see figure 7-1). The  
instructions reading the latch rather than the pin read a value, possibly change it, and then rewrite  
it to the latch. These are called "read-modify-write" instructions, which are listed in table 7-2. lf the  
destination is a port or a port bit, these instructions read the latch rather than the pin. Note that all  
other instructions which can be used to read a port, exclusively read the port pin. In any case,  
reading from latch or pin, resp., is performed by reading the SFR P0 to P5; for example,  
"MOV A, P3" reads the value from port 3 pins, while "ANL P4, #0AA " reads from the latch,  
H
modifies the value and writes it back to the latch.  
Semiconductor Group  
45  
On-Chip Peripheral Components  
Table 7-2  
Read-Modify-Write Instructions  
Instruction  
ANL  
Function  
Logic AND; e.g. ANL P1, A  
Logic OR; e.g. ORL P2, A  
ORL  
XRL  
Logic exclusive OR; e.g. XRL P3, A  
Jump if bit is set and clear bit; e.g. JBC P1.1, LABEL  
Complement bit; e.g. CPL P3.0  
Increment byte; e.g. INC P4  
JBC  
CPL  
INC  
DEC  
Decrement byte; e.g. DEC P5  
DJNZ  
Decrement and jump if not zero; e.g. DJNZ P3, LABEL  
Move carry bit to bit y of port x  
Clear bit y of port x  
MOV Px.y, C  
CLR Px.y  
SETB Px.y  
Set bit y of port x  
lt is not obvious that the last three instructions in this list are read-modify-write instructions, but they  
are. The reason is that they read the port byte, all 8 bits, modify the addressed bit, then write the  
complete byte back to the latch.  
The reason why read-modify-write instructions are directed to the latch rather than the pin is to avoid  
a possible misinterpretation of the voltage level at the pin. For example, a port bit might be used to  
drive the base of a transistor. When a "1" is written to the bit, the transistor is turned on. lf the CPU  
then reads the same port bit at the pin rather than the latch, it will read the base voltage of the  
transistor (approx. 0.7 V, i.e. a logic low level !) and interpret it as "0". For example, when modifying  
a port bit by a SETB or CLR instruction, another bit in this port with the above mentioned  
configuration might be changed if the value read from the pin were written back to the latch.  
However, reading the latch rather than the pin will return the correct value of "1".  
Semiconductor Group  
46  
On-Chip Peripheral Components  
7.2  
Serial Interfaces  
The serial port of the SAB 80(C)515S enables communication between microcontrollers or between  
the microcontroller and peripheral devices.  
The serial port is full-duplex, meaning it can transmit and receive simultaneously. It is also receive  
buffered, meaning it can commence reception of a second byte before a previously received byte  
has been read from the receive register (however, if the first byte still has not been read by the time  
reception of the second byte is complete, the last received byte will be lost). The serial channel is  
completely compatible with the serial channel of the SAB 80(C)51.  
7.2.1  
Operating Modes of Serial Interface  
The serial interface can operate in four modes (one synchronous mode, three asynchronous  
modes). The baud rate clock for this interface is derived from the oscillator frequency (mode 0, 2)  
or generated either by timer 1 or by a dedicated baud rate generator (mode 1, 3). A more detailed  
description of how to set the baud rate will follow in section 7.2.3.  
Mode 0: shift register (synchronous) mode:  
Serial data enters and exits through RxD. TxD outputs the shift clock. 8 data bits are transmitted/  
received (LSB first). The baud rate is fixed at 1/12 of the oscillator frequency.  
Mode 1: 8-bit UART, variable baud rate:  
10 bits are transmitted (through TxD) or received (through RxD): a start bit (0), 8 data bits (LSB first),  
and a stop bit (1). On reception, the stop bit goes into RB8 in special function register SCON. The  
baud rate is variable.  
Mode 2: 9-bit UART, fixed baud rate:  
11 bits are transmitted (through TxD) or received (through RxD): a start bit (0), 8 data bits (LSB first),  
a programmable 9th bit, and a stop bit (1). On transmission, the 9th data bit (TB8 in SCON) can be  
assigned to the value of 0 or 1. For example, the parity bit (P in the PSW) could be moved into TB8  
or a second stop bit by setting TB8 to 1. On reception the 9th data bit goes into RB8 in special  
function register SCON, while the stop bit is ignored. The baud rate is programmable to either 1/32  
or 1/64 of the oscillator frequency.  
Mode 3: 9-bit UART, variable baud rate:  
11 bits are transmitted (through TxD) or received (through RxD): a start bit (0), 8 data bits (LSB first),  
a programmable 9th bit, and a stop bit (1). On transmission, the 9th data bit (TB8 in SCON) can be  
assigned to the value of 0 or 1. For example, the parity bit (P in the PSW) could be moved into TB8  
or a second stop bit by setting TB8 to 1. On reception, the 9th data bit goes into RB8 in special  
function register SCON, while the stop bit is ignored. In fact, mode 3 is the same as mode 2 in all  
respects except the baud rate. The baud rate in mode 3 is variable.  
Semiconductor Group  
47  
On-Chip Peripheral Components  
In all four modes, transmission is initiated by any instruction that uses SBUF as a destination  
register. Reception is initiated in mode 0 by the condition RI = 0 and REN = 1. Reception is initiated  
in the other modes by the incoming start bit if REN = 1. The serial interfaces also provide interrupt  
requests when a transmission or a reception of a frame has completed. The corresponding interrupt  
request flags for serial interface are TI or RI, resp. See section 8 for more details about the interrupt  
structure. The interrupt request flags TI and RI can also be used for polling the serial interface if the  
serial interrupt is not to be used (i.e. serial interrupt not enabled).  
The control and status bits of the serial channel 0 in special function register S0CON are illustrated  
in figure 7-8. Figure 7-7 shows the special function register S0BUF which is the data register for  
receive and transmit. The following table summarizes the operating modes of serial interface 0.  
Figure 7-7  
Special Function Register SCON (Address 98 )  
H
9F  
9E  
9D  
9C  
9B  
9A  
99  
98  
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
98  
SM0  
SM1  
SM2  
REN  
TB8  
RB8  
TI  
RI  
SCON  
H
Bit  
Symbol  
SM0  
SM1  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Serial mode 0:  
Serial mode 1:  
Serial mode 2:  
Serial mode 3:  
Shift register mode, fixed baud rate  
8-bit UART, variable baud rate  
9-bit UART, fixed baud rate  
9-bit UART, variable baud rate  
SM2  
Enables the multiprocessor communication feature in modes 2 and 3. In  
mode 2 or 3 and SM2 being set to 1, RI will not be activated if the  
received 9th data bit (RB8) is 0. In mode 1 and SM2 = 1, RI will not be  
activated if a valid stop bit has not been received. In mode 0, SM2 should  
be 0.  
REN  
TB8  
RB8  
Receiver enable. Enables serial reception. Set by software to enable  
reception. Cleared by software to disable reception.  
Transmitter bit 8. Is the 9th data bit that will be transmitted in modes 2  
and 3. Set or cleared by software as desired.  
Receiver bit 8. In modes 2 and 3 it is the 9th bit that was received. In  
mode 1, if SM2 = 0, RB8 is the stop bit that was received. In mode 0,  
RB8 is not used.  
TI  
Transmitter interrupt. Is the transmit interrupt flag. Set by hardware at  
the end of the 8th bit time in mode 0, or at the beginning of the stop bit  
in the other modes, in any serial transmission. Must by cleared by  
software.  
RI  
Receiver interrupt. Is the receive interrupt flag. Set by hardware at the  
end of the 8th bit time in mode 0, or during the stop bit time in the other  
modes, in any serial reception. Must be cleared by software.  
Semiconductor Group  
48  
On-Chip Peripheral Components  
The control and status bits of the serial channel in special function register SCON are illustrated in  
figure 7-8. Figure 7-7 shows the special function register SBUF which is the data register for  
receive and transmit. The following table summarizes the operating modes of the serial interface.  
Table 7-3  
Serial Interface, Mode Selection  
SM0  
SM1  
Mode  
Descriptions  
Shift register  
8-bit UART  
9-bit UART  
9-bit UART  
Baud Rate  
OSC/12  
Variable  
OSC/64 or fOSC/32  
Variable  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
2
3
f
f
Figure 7-8  
Special Function Register SBUF (Address 99 )  
H
99  
Serial interface buffer register  
SBUF  
H
Receive and transmit buffer of serial interface. Writing to SBUF loads the transmit register and  
initiates transmission. Reading out SBUF accesses a physically separate receive register.  
Semiconductor Group  
49  
On-Chip Peripheral Components  
7.2.2  
Multiprocessor Communication Feature  
Modes 2 and 3 of the serial interface 0 have a special provision for multi-processor communication.  
In these modes, 9 data bits are received. The 9th bit goes into RB8. Then a stop bit follows. The  
port can be programmed such that when the stop bit is received, the serial port 0 interrupt will be  
activated (i.e. the request flag RI is set) only if RB8 = 1. This feature is enabled by setting bit SM2  
in SCON. A way to use this feature in multiprocessor communications is as follows.  
lf the master processor wants to transmit a block of data to one of the several slaves, it first sends  
out an address byte which identifies the target slave. An address byte differs from a data byte in  
that the 9th bit is 1 in an address byte and 0 in a data byte. With SM2 = 1, no slave will be interrupted  
by a data byte. An address byte, however, will interrupt all slaves, so that each slave can examine  
the received byte and see if it is being addressed. The addressed slave will clear its SM2 bit and  
prepare to receive the data bytes that will be coming. After having received a complete message,  
the slave sets SM2 again. The slaves that were not addressed leave their SM2 set and go on about  
their business, ignoring the incoming data bytes.  
SM2 has no effect in mode 0. In mode 1 SM2 can be used to check the validity of the stop bit. lf  
SM2 = 1 in mode 1, the receive interrupt will not be activated unless a valid stop bit is received.  
7.2.3  
Baud Rates  
As already mentioned there are several possibilities to generate the baud rate clock for the serial  
interface depending on the mode in which it is operated.  
To clarify the terminology, something should be said about the difference between "baud rate clock"  
and "baud rate". The serial interface requires a clock rate which is 16 times the baud rate for internal  
synchronization, as mentioned in the detailed description of the various operating modes in section  
7.2.4.  
Therefore, the baud rate generator have to provide a "baud rate clock" to the serial interface which -  
there divided by 16 - results in the actual "baud rate". However, all formulas given in the following  
section already include the factor and calculate the final baud rate.  
Semiconductor Group  
50  
On-Chip Peripheral Components  
Mode 0  
The baud rate in mode 0 is fixed:  
oscillator frequency  
Mode 0 baud rate =  
12  
Mode 2  
The baud rate in mode 2 depends on the value of bit SMOD in special function register PCON (see  
figure 7-9). If SMOD = 0 (which is the value after reset), the baud rate is 1/64 of the oscillator  
frequency. If SMOD = 1, the baud rate is 1/32 of the oscillator frequency.  
2SMOD  
Mode 2 baud rate =  
x oscillator frequency  
64  
Figure 7-9  
Special Function Register PCON (Address 87 )  
H
87  
SMOD PDS  
IDLS  
GF1  
GF0  
PDE  
IDLE PCON  
H
These bits are not used in controlling serial interface.  
Bit  
Function  
SMOD  
When set, the baud rate of serial interface in modes 1, 2, 3 is doubled.  
Modes 1 and 3  
In these modes the baud rate is variable and can be generated alternatively by a dedicated baud  
rate generator or by timer 1.  
Using the baud rate generator:  
In modes 1 and 3, the SAB 80(C)515 can use the internal baud rate generator for the serial  
interface. To enable this feature, bit BD (bit 7 of special function register ADCON) must be set (see  
figure 7-10). This baud rate generator divides the oscillator frequency by 2500. Bit SMOD  
(PCON.7) also can be used to enable a multiply by two prescaler (see figure 7-9). At 12-MHz  
oscillator frequency, the commonly used baud rates 4800 baud (SMOD = 0) and 9600 baud (SMOD  
= 1) are available. The baud rate is determined by SMOD and the oscillator frequency as follows:  
2SMOD  
Mode 1, 3 baud rate =  
Semiconductor Group  
x oscillator frequency  
2500  
51  
On-Chip Peripheral Components  
Figure 7-10  
Special Function Register ADCON (Address 0D8 )  
H
0DF  
BD  
0DE  
0DD  
0DC  
0DB  
0DA  
0D9  
0D8  
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
0D8  
CLK ADEX BSY  
ADM  
MX2  
MX1  
MX0 ADCON  
H
These bits are not used in controlling serial interface.  
Bit  
Function  
BD  
Baud rate enable.  
When set, the baud rate in modes 1 and 3 of serial interface is taken from  
a dedicated prescaler. Standard baud rates 4800 and 9600 baud at  
12-MHz oscillator frequency can be achieved.  
Using timer 1 to generate baud rates:  
Timer 1 can be used for generating baud rates in mode 1 and 3 of the serial channel. Then the baud  
rate is determined by the timer 1 overflow rate and the value of SMOD as follows:  
2SMOD  
Mode 1, 3 baud rate =  
x (Timer 1 OV-rate)  
32  
The timer 1 interrupt is usually disabled in this application. The timer itself can be configured for  
either "timer" or "counter" operation, and in any of its operating modes. In the most typical  
applications, it is configured for "timer" operation in the auto-reload mode (high nibble of  
TMOD = 0010B). In the case, the baud rate is given by the formula:  
2SMOD  
x oscillator frequency  
Mode 1, 3 baud rate =  
32 x 12 x (256 – (TH1))  
One can achieve very low baud rates with timer 1 by leaving the timer 1 interrupt enabled,  
configuring the timer to run as 16-bit timer (high nibble of TMOD = 0001B), and using the timer 1  
interrupt for a 16-bit software reload.  
Table 7-4 lists various commonly used baud rates and shows how they can be obtained from  
timer 1.  
Semiconductor Group  
52  
On-Chip Peripheral Components  
Table 7-4  
Timer 1 Generated Commonly Used Baud Rates  
Baud Rate  
f
OSC (MHz)  
SMOD  
Timer 1  
Mode  
C/T  
Reload  
Value  
Mode 1, 3:  
62.5 Kbaud  
19.5 Kbaud  
9.6 Kbaud  
4.8 Kbaud  
2.4 Kbaud  
1.2 Kbaud  
110 Baud  
110 Baud  
12.0  
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
FF  
H
11.059  
11.059  
11.059  
11.059  
11.059  
6.0  
FD  
H
FD  
H
FA  
H
F4  
H
E8  
H
72  
H
12.0  
FEEB  
H
Figure 7-11 shows the mechanisms for baud rate generation of serial channel, while table 7-5  
summarizes the baud rate formulas for all usual configurations.  
Figure 7-11  
Generation of Baud Rates for Serial Interface  
Semiconductor Group  
53  
On-Chip Peripheral Components  
Table 7-5  
Baud Rates of Serial Interface 0  
Baud Rate Derived  
from  
Interface  
Mode  
Baud Rate  
2SMOD  
Timer 1 in mode 1  
1, 3  
1
x
x
x (timer 1 overflow rate)  
2
16  
2SMOD  
2
1
fOSC  
Timer 1 in mode 2  
1, 3  
x
16 12 x (256 – (TH1))  
2SMOD  
1
fOSC  
Oscillator  
2
x
x
x
x
2
16  
2
2SMOD  
2
1
fOSC  
Baud rate generator  
1, 3  
16  
1250  
7.2.4  
Detailed Description of the Operating Modes  
The following sections give a more detailed description of the several operating modes of the serial  
interface.  
7.2.4.1 Mode 0, Synchronous Mode  
Serial data enters and exits through RxD. TxD outputs the shift clock. 8 bits are transmitted/  
received: 8 data bits (LSB first). The baud rate is fixed at 1/12 of the oscillator frequency.  
Figures 7-16 a) and b) show a simplified functional diagram of the serial port in mode 0, and  
associated timing.  
Transmission is initiated by any instruction that uses SBUF as a destination register. The "write-to-  
SBUF" signal at S6P2 also loads a 1 into the 9th bit position of the transmit shift register and tells  
the TX control block to commence a transmission. The internal timing is such that one full machine  
cycle will elapse between "write-to-SBUF" and activation of SEND.  
Semiconductor Group  
54  
On-Chip Peripheral Components  
SEND enables the output of the shift register to the alternate output function line P3.0, and also  
enables SHIFT CLOCK to the alternate output function line P3.1. SHIFT CLOCK is low during S3,  
S4, and S5 of every machine cycle, and high during S6, S1, and S2, while the interface is  
transmitting. Before and after transmission SHIFT CLOCK remains high. At S6P2 of every machine  
cycle in which SEND is active, the contents of the transmit shift register is shifted one position to  
the right.  
As data bits shift to the right, zeros come in from the left. When the MSB of the data byte is at the  
output position of the shift register, then the 1 that was initially loaded into the 9th position, is just  
left of the MSB, and all positions to the left of that contain zeros. This condition flags the TX control  
block to do one last shift and then deactivates SEND and sets TI. Both of these actions occur at  
S1P1 in the 10th machine cycle after "write-to-SBUF".  
Reception is initiated by the condition REN = 1 and RI = 0. At S6P2 in the next machine cycle, the  
RX control unit writes the bits 1111 1110 to the receive shift register, and in the next clock phase  
activates RECEIVE.  
RECEIVE enables SHIFT CLOCK to the alternate output function line of P3.1. SHIFT CLOCK  
makes transitions at S3P1 and S6P1 in every machine cycle. At S6P2 of every machine cycle in  
which RECEIVE is active, the contents of the receive shift register are shifted one position to the  
left. The value that comes in from the right is the value that was sampled at the P3.0 pin at S5P2 in  
the same machine cycle.  
As data bits come in from the right, 1 s shift out to the left. When the 0 that was initially loaded into  
the rightmost position arrives at the leftmost position in the shift register, it flags the RX control block  
to do one last shift and load SBUF. At S1P1 in the 10th machine cycle after the write to SCON that  
cleared RI, RECEIVE is cleared and RI is set.  
7.2.4.2 Mode 1, 8-Bit UART  
Ten bits are transmitted (through TxD), or received (through RxD): a start bit (0), 8 data bits (LSB  
first), and a stop bit (1). On reception through RxD, the stop bit goes into RB8 (SCON).  
The baud rate for serial interface 0 is determined by the timer 1 overflow rate or by the internal baud  
rate generator.  
Figures 7-17 a) and b) show a simplified functional diagram of the serial channel in mode 1. The  
generation of the baud rate clock is described in section 7.2.3.  
Semiconductor Group  
55  
On-Chip Peripheral Components  
Transmission is initiated by any instruction that uses SBUF as a destination register. The "write-to-  
SBUF" signal also loads a 1 into the 9th bit position of the transmit shift register and flags the TX  
control block that a transmission is requested. Transmission actually commences at S1P1 of the  
machine cycle following the next roll-over in the divide-by-16 counter (thus, the bit times are  
synchronized to the divide-by-16 counter, not to the "write-to-SBUF" signal).  
The transmission begins with activation of SEND, which puts the start bit to TxD. One bit time later,  
DATA is activated, which enables the output bit of the transmit shift register to TxD. The first shift  
pulse occurs one bit time after that.  
As data bits shift out to the right, zeros are clocked in from the left. When the MSB of the data byte  
is at the output position of the shift register, then the 1 that was initially loaded into the 9th position,  
is just left of the MSB, and all positions to the left of that contain zero. This condition flags the TX  
control to do one last shift and then deactivates SEND and sets TI. This occurs at the 10th divide-  
by-16 rollover after "write-to-SBUF".  
Reception is initiated by a detected 1-to-0 transition at RxD. For this purpose RxD is sampled at a  
rate of 16 times whatever baud rate has been established. When a reception is detected, the divide-  
by-16 counter is immediately reset, and 1FF is written into the input shift register. Resetting the  
H
divide-by-16 counter aligns its rollover with the boundaries of the incoming bit times.  
The 16 states of the counter divide each bit time into 16 counter states. At the 7th, 8th and 9th  
counter state of each bit time, the bit detector samples the value of RxD. The value accepted is the  
value that was seen in at least 2 of the 3 samples. This is done for noise rejection. lf the value  
accepted during the first bit time is not 0, the receive circuits are reset and the unit goes back looking  
for another 1-to-0 transition. This is to provide rejection of false start bits. lf the start bit proves valid,  
it is shifted into the input shift register, and reception of the rest of the frame will proceed.  
As data bits come from the right, 1’s shift out to the left. When the start bit arrives at the leftmost  
position in the shift register (which in mode 1 is a 9-bit register), it flags the RX control block to do  
one last shift. The signal to load SBUF and RB8 and to set RI will be generated if, and only if, the  
following conditions are met at the time the final shift pulse is generated:  
1) RI = 0, and  
2) either SM2 = 0 or the received stop bit = 1  
lf either of these two conditions is not met the received frame is irretrievably lost. lf both conditions  
are met, the stop bit goes into RB8, the 8 data bits go into SBUF, and RI is activated. At this time,  
no matter whether the above conditions are met or not, the unit goes back to looking for a 1-to-0  
transition in RxD.  
Semiconductor Group  
56  
On-Chip Peripheral Components  
7.2.4.3 Mode 2, 9-Bit UART  
Mode 2 is functionally identical to mode 3 (see below). The only exception is, that in mode 2 the  
baud rate can be programmed to two fixed quantities: either 1/32 or 1/64 of the oscillator frequency.  
In mode 3 the baud rate clock is generated by timer 1, which is incremented by a rate of fOSC/12 or  
by the internal baud rate generator.  
7.2.4.4 Mode 3, 9-Bit UART  
Eleven bits are transmitted (through TxD), or received (through RxD): a start bit (0), 8 data bits (LSB  
first), a programmable 9th data bit, and a stop bit (1). On transmission, the 9th data bit (TB8) can  
be assigned the value of 0 or 1. On reception the 9th data bit goes into RB8 in SCON.  
The baud rate is generated by either using timer 1 or the internal baud rate generator (see section  
7.2.3).  
Figures 7-18 a) and b) show a functional diagram of the serial interfaces in mode 2 and 3 and  
associated timing. The receive portion is exactly the same as in mode 1. The transmit portion differs  
from mode 1 only in the 9th bit of the transmit shift register.  
Transmission is initiated by any instruction that uses SBUF as a destination register. The "write to  
SBUF" signal also loads TB8 into the 9th bit position of the transmit shift register and flags the TX  
control unit that a transmission is requested. Transmission commences at S1P1 of the machine  
cycle following the next rollover in the divide-by-16 counter (thus the bit times are synchronized to  
the divide-by-16 counter, and not to the "write-to-SBUF" signal).  
The transmission begins with the activation of SEND, which puts the start bit to TxD. One bit time  
later, DATA is activated which enables the output bit of transmit shift register to TxD. The first shift  
pulse occurs one bit time after that. The first shift clocks a 1 (the stop bit) into the 9th bit position of  
the shift register. Thereafter, only zeros are clocked in. Thus, as data shift out to the right, zeros are  
clocked in from the left. When TB8 is at the output position of the shift register, then the stop bit is  
just left of the TB8, and all positions to the left of that contain zeros.  
This condition flags the TX control unit to do one last shift and then deactivate SEND and set TI.  
This occurs at the 11th divide-by-16 rollover after "write-to-SBUF".  
Reception is initiated by a detected 1-to-0 transition at RxD. For this purpose RxD is sampled of a  
rate of 16 times whatever baud rate has been established. When a transition is detected, the divide-  
by-16 counter is immediately reset, and 1F is written to the input shift register.  
H
Semiconductor Group  
57  
On-Chip Peripheral Components  
At the 7th, 8th and 9th counter state of each bit time, the bit detector samples the value of RxD. The  
value accepted is the value that was seen in at least 2 of the 3 samples. lf the value accepted during  
the first bit time is not 0, the receive circuits are reset and the unit goes back to looking for another  
1-to-0 transition. lf the start bit proves valid, it is shifted into the input shift register, and reception of  
the rest of the frame will proceed.  
As data bits come from the right, 1 s shift out to the left. When the start bit arrives at the leftmost  
position in the shift register (which is a 9-bit register), it flags the RX control block to do one last shift,  
load SBUF and RB8, and set RI. The signal to load SBUF and RB8, and to set RI, will be generated  
if, and only if, the following conditions are met at the time the final shift pulse is generated:  
1) RI = 0, and  
2) either SM2 = 0 or the received 9th data bit = 1  
lf either one of these two conditions is not met, the received frame is irretrievably lost, and RI is not  
set. lf both conditions are met, the received 9th data bit goes into RB8, the first 8 data bits go into  
SBUF. One bit time later, no matter whether the above conditions are met or not, the unit goes back  
to look for a 1-to-0 transition at the RxD.  
Note that the value of the received stop bit is irrelevant to SBUF, RB8, or RI.  
Semiconductor Group  
58  
On-Chip Peripheral Components  
Figure 7-16 a)  
Functional Diagram - Serial Interface, Mode 0  
Semiconductor Group  
59  
On-Chip Peripheral Components  
Figure 7-16 b)  
Timing Diagram - Serial Interface, Mode 0  
Semiconductor Group  
60  
On-Chip Peripheral Components  
Figure 7-17 a)  
Functional Diagram - Serial Interface, Mode 1  
Semiconductor Group  
61  
On-Chip Peripheral Components  
Figure 7-17 b)  
Timing Diagram - Serial Interface, Mode 1  
Semiconductor Group  
62  
On-Chip Peripheral Components  
Figure 7-18 a)  
Functional Diagram - Serial Interface, Modes 2 and 3  
Semiconductor Group  
63  
On-Chip Peripheral Components  
Figure 7-18 b)  
Timing Diagram - Serial Interface, Modes 2 and 3  
Semiconductor Group  
64  
On-Chip Peripheral Components  
7.3  
Timer 0 and Timer 1  
The SAB 80(C)515 three general purpose 16-bit timer/counters: timer 0, timer 1, timer 2 and the  
compare timer (timer 2 is discussed separately in section 7.5). Timer/counter 0 and 1 are fully  
compatible with timer/counters 0 and 1 of the SAB 80(C)51 and can be used in the same operating  
modes.  
Timer/counter 0 and 1 which are discussed in this section can be configured to operate either as  
timers or event counters:  
– In "timer" function, the register is incremented every machine cycle. Thus one can think of it  
as counting machine cycles. Since a machine cycle consists of 12 oscillator periods, the count  
rate is 1/12 of the oscillator frequency.  
– In "counter" function, the register is incremented in response to a 1-to-0 transition (falling  
edge) at its corresponding external input pin, T0 or T1 (alternate functions of P3.4 and P3.5,  
resp.). In this function the external input is sampled during S5P2 of every machine cycle.  
When the samples show a high in one cycle and a low in the next cycle, the count is  
incremented. The new count value appears in the register during S3P1 of the cycle following  
the one in which the transition was detected. Since it takes two machine cycles (24 oscillator  
periods) to recognize a 1-to-0 transition, the maximum count rate is 1/24 of the oscillator  
frequency. There are no restrictions on the duty cycle of the external input signal, but to  
ensure that a given level is sampled at least once before it changes, it must be held for at least  
one full machine cycle.  
In addition to the "timer" and "counter" selection, timer/counters 0 and 1 have four operating modes  
from which to select.  
Semiconductor Group  
65  
On-Chip Peripheral Components  
Figure 7-19  
Special Function Register TCON (Address 88 )  
H
8F  
8E  
8D  
8C  
8B  
8A  
89  
88  
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
88  
TF1  
TR1  
TF0  
TR0  
IE1  
IT1  
IE0  
IT0  
TCON  
H
These bits are not used in controlling timer/counter 0 and 1.  
Bit  
Function  
TR0  
Timer 0 run control bit.  
Set/cleared by software to turn timer/counter 0 ON/OFF.  
TF0  
TR1  
TF1  
Timer 0 overflow flag. Set by hardware on timer/counter overflow.  
Cleared by hardware when processor vectors to interrupt routine.  
Timer 1 run control bit.  
Set/cleared by software to turn timer/counter 1 ON/OFF.  
Timer 1 overflow flag. Set by hardware on timer/counter overflow.  
Cleared by hardware when processor vectors to interrupt routine.  
Each timer consists of two 8-bit registers (TH0 and TL0 for timer/counter 0, TH1 and TL1 for timer/  
counter 1) which may be combined to one timer configuration depending on the mode that is  
established. The functions of the timers are controlled by two special function registers TCON and  
TMOD, shown in figures 7-19 and 7-20.  
In the following descriptions the symbols TH0 and TL0 are used specify the high-byte and low-byte  
of timer 0 (TH1 and TL1 for timer 1, respectively). The operating modes are described and shown  
for timer 0. If not explicitly noted, this applies also to timer 1.  
Semiconductor Group  
66  
On-Chip Peripheral Components  
Figure 7-20  
Special Function Register TMOD (Address 89 )  
H
89  
GATE  
C/T  
M1  
M0  
GATE  
C/T  
M1  
M0  
TMOD  
H
Timer 1  
Timer 0  
Timer/counter 0/1 mode control register.  
Bit  
Symbol  
Gate  
C/T  
Gating control.  
When set, timer/counter "x" is enabled only while "INTx" pin is high and  
"TRx" control bit is set.  
When cleared timer "x" is enabled whenever "TRx" control bit is set.  
Counter or timer select bit.  
Set for counter operation (input from "Tx" input pin).  
Cleared for timer operation (input from internal system clock).  
M1  
0
M0  
0
8-bit timer/counter  
"THx" operates as 8-bit timer/counter  
"TLx" serves as 5-bit prescaler.  
0
1
1
0
16-bit timer/counter.  
"THx" and "TLx" are cascaded; there is no prescaler.  
8-bit auto-reload timer/counter.  
"THx" holds a value which is to be reloaded into "TLx" each time it  
overflows.  
1
1
1
1
Timer 0:  
TL0 is an 8-bit timer/counter controlled by the standard timer 0 control  
bits. TH00 is an 8-bit timer only controlled by timer 1 control bits.  
Timer 1:  
Timer/counter 1 stops  
Semiconductor Group  
67  
On-Chip Peripheral Components  
7.3.1  
Mode 0  
Putting either timer/counter into mode 0 configures it as an 8-bit timer/counter with a divide-by-32  
prescaler. Figure 7-21 shows the mode 0 operation.  
In this mode, the timer register is configured as a 13-bit register. As the count rolls over from all 1’s  
to all 0’s, it sets the timer overflow flag TF0. The overflow flag TF0 then can be used to request an  
interrupt (see section 8 for details about the interrupt structure).  
The counted input is enabled to the timer when TR0 = 1 and either GATE = 0 or INT0 = 1 (setting  
GATE = 1 allows the timer to be controlled by external input INT0, to facilitate pulse width  
measurements). TR0 is a control bit in the special function register TCON; GATE is in TMOD.  
The 13-bit register consists of all 8 bits of TH1 and the lower 5 bits of TL0. The upper 3 bits of TL0  
are indeterminate and should be ignored. Setting the run flag (TR0) does not clear the registers.  
Mode 0 operation is the same for timer 0 as for timer 1. Substitute TR1, TF1, TH1, TL1, and INT1  
for the corresponding timer 1 signals in figure 7-21. There are two different gate bits, one for timer 1  
(TMOD.7) and one for timer 0 (TMOD.3).  
Figure 7-21  
Timer/Counter 0, Mode 0: 13 Bit-Timer/Counter  
The same applies to timer/counter 1  
Semiconductor Group  
68  
On-Chip Peripheral Components  
7.3.2  
Mode 1  
Mode 1 is the same as mode 0, except that the timer register is run with all 16 bits. Mode 1 is shown  
in figure 7-22.  
Figure 7-22  
Timer/Counter 0, Mode 1: 16-Bit Timer/Counter  
The same applies to timer/counter 1  
Semiconductor Group  
69  
On-Chip Peripheral Components  
7.3.3  
Mode 2  
Mode 2 configures the timer register as an 8-bit counter (TL0) with automatic reload, as shown in  
figure 7-23. Overflow from TL0 not only sets TF0, but also reloads TL0 with the contents of TH0,  
which is preset by software. The reload leaves TH0 unchanged.  
Figure 7-23  
Timer/Counter 0, Mode 2: 8-Bit Timer/Counter with Auto-Reload  
The same applies to timer/counter 1  
Semiconductor Group  
70  
On-Chip Peripheral Components  
7.3.4  
Mode 3  
Mode 3 has different effects on timer 0 and timer 1. Timer 1 in mode 3 simply holds its count. The  
effect is the same as setting TR1 = 0. Timer 0 in mode 3 establishes TL0 and TH0 as two separate  
counters. The logic for mode 3 on timer 0 is shown in figure 7-24. TL0 uses the timer 0 control bits:  
C/T, GATE, TR0, INT0, and TF0. TH0 is locked into a timer function (counting machine cycles) and  
takes over the use of TR1 and TF1 from timer 1. Thus, TH0 now controls the "timer 1" interrupt.  
Mode 3 is provided for applications requiring an extra 8-bit timer or counter. When timer 0 is in  
mode 3, timer 1 can be turned on and off by switching it out of and into its own mode 3, or can still  
be used by the serial channel as a baud rate generator, or in fact, in any application not requiring  
an interrupt from timer 1 itself.  
Figure 7-24  
Timer/Counter 0, Mode 3: Two 8-Bit Timers/Counters  
Semiconductor Group  
71  
On-Chip Peripheral Components  
7.4  
A/D Converter  
The SAB 80(C)515 provides an A/D converter with the following features:  
– Eight multiplexed input channels  
– The possibility of using the analog input channels (port 6) as digital inputs (ACMOS version  
only).  
– Programmable internal reference voltages (16 steps each) via resistor array  
– 8-bit resolution within the selected reference voltage range  
– 13 machine cycles conversion time for ACMOS versions (including sample time)  
– 15 machine cycles conversion time for MYMOS versions (including sample time)  
– Internal start-of-conversion trigger  
– Interrupt request generation after each conversion  
For the conversion, the method of successive approximation via capacitor array is used. The  
externally applied reference voltage range has to be held on a fixed value within the specifications  
(see section "A/D Converter Characteristics" in the data sheet). The internal reference voltages can  
be varied to reduce the reference voltage range of the A/D converter and thus to achieve a higher  
resolution.  
Figure 7-25 shows a block diagram of the A/D converter. There are three user-accessible special  
function registers:  
ADCON (A/D converter control register), ADDAT (A/D converter data register) and DAPR (D/A  
converter program register) for the programmable reference voltages.  
Semiconductor Group  
72  
On-Chip Peripheral Components  
Figure 7-25  
A/D Converter Block Diagram  
Semiconductor Group  
73  
On-Chip Peripheral Components  
7.4.1  
Function and Control  
7.4.1.1 lnitialization and Input Channel Selection  
Special function register ADCON which is illustrated in figure 7-26 is used to set the operating  
modes, to check the status, and to select one of eight analog input channels.  
Figure 7-26  
Special Function Register ADCON (Address 0D8 )  
H
0DF  
0DE  
0DD  
0DC  
0DB  
0DA  
0D9  
0D8  
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
0D8  
BD  
CLK  
BSY  
ADM  
MX2  
MX1  
MX0 ADCON  
H
These bits are not used in controlling A/D converter functions.  
Bit  
Function  
MX0  
MX1  
MX2  
Select 8 input channels of the A/D converter, see table 7-6  
ADM  
A/D conversion mode. When set, a continuous conversion is selected. If  
ADM = 0, the converter stops after one conversion.  
BSY  
Busy flag. This flag indicates whether a conversion is in progress  
(BSY = 1). The flag is cleared by hardware when the conversion is  
completed.  
Register ADCON contains two mode bits. Bit ADM is used to choose the single or continuous  
conversion mode. In single conversion mode only one conversion is performed after starting, while  
in continuous conversion mode after the first start a new conversion is automatically started on  
completion of the previous one.  
The busy flag BSY (ADCON.4) is automatically set when a conversion is in progress. After  
completion of the conversion it is reset by hardware. This flag can be read only, a write has no  
effect. There is also an interrupt request flag IADC (IRCON.0) that is set when a conversion is  
completed. See section 8 for more details about the interrupt structure.  
Semiconductor Group  
74  
On-Chip Peripheral Components  
Table 7-6  
Selection of the Analog Input Channels  
MX2  
MX1  
MX0  
Selected Channel  
Pin  
MYMOS  
AN0  
ACMOS  
P6.0  
P6.1  
P6.2  
P6.3  
P6.4  
P6.5  
P6.6  
P6.7  
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Analog input 0  
Analog input 1  
Analog input 2  
Analog input 3  
Analog input 4  
Analog input 5  
Analog input 6  
Analog input 7  
AN1  
AN2  
AN3  
AN4  
AN5  
AN6  
AN7  
The bits MX0 to MX2 in special function register ADCON are used for selection of the analog input  
channels.  
Port 6 of the ACMOS versions is a dual purpose input port. lf the input voltage meets the specified  
logic levels, it can be used as digital input as well regardless of whether the pin levels are sampled  
by the A/D converter at the same time.  
The special function register ADDAT (figure 7-28) holds the converted digital 8-bit data result. The  
data remains in ADDAT until it is overwritten by the next converted data. ADDAT can be read or  
written under software control. lf the A/D converter of the SAB 80(C)515 is not used, register  
ADDAT can be used as an additional general purpose register.  
Figure 7-28  
Special Function Register ADDAT (Address 0D9 )  
H
0D9  
Conversion result  
ADDAT  
H
This register contains the 8-bit conversion result.  
7.4.1.2 Start of Conversion  
An internal start of conversion is triggered by a write-to-DAPR instruction. The start procedure itself  
is independent of the value which is written to DAPR. However, the value in DAPR determines  
which internal reference voltages are used for the conversion (see section 7.4.2).  
When single conversion mode is selected (ADM = 0) only one conversion is performed. In  
continuous mode after completion of a conversion a new conversion is triggered automatically, until  
bit ADM is reset.  
Semiconductor Group  
75  
On-Chip Peripheral Components  
7.4.2  
Reference Voltages  
The SAB 80(C)515 has two pins to which a reference voltage range for the on-chip A/D converter  
is applied (pin VAREF for the upper voltage and pin VAGND for the lower voltage). In contrast to  
conventional A/D converters it is now possible to use not only these externally applied reference  
voltages for the conversion but also internally generated reference voltages which are derived from  
the externally applied ones. For this purpose a resistor ladder provides 16 equidistant voltage levels  
between VAREF and VAGND. These steps can individually be assigned as upper and lower reference  
voltage for the converter itself. These internally generated reference voltages are called VlntAREF and  
V
lntAGND. The internal reference voltage programming can be thought of as a programmable "D/A  
converter" which provides the voltages VIntARFF and VIntAGND for the A/D converter itself.  
The SFR DAPR (see figure 7-29) is provided for programming the internal reference voltages  
V
IntAREF and VlntAGND. For this purpose the internal reference voltages can be programmed in steps of  
1/16 of the external reference voltages (VAREF VAGND) by four bits each in register DAPR. Bits 0 to  
3 specify VlntAGND, while bits 4 to 7 specify VIntAREF. A minimum of 1 V difference is required between  
the internal reference voltages VlntARF and VIntAGND for proper operation of the A/D converter. This  
means, for example, in the case where VAREF is 5 V and VAGND is 0 V, there must be at least four  
steps difference between the internal reference voltages VIntAREF and VIntAGND  
.
The values of VIntAGND and VIntAREF are given by the formulas:  
DAPR (.3-.0)  
V
IntAGND = VAGND  
+
(VAREF VAGND  
)
16  
with DAPR (.3-.0) < C ;  
H
DAPR (.7-.4)  
16  
VIntAREF = VAGND  
+
(VAREF VAGND  
)
with DAPR (.7-.4) > 3 ;  
H
DAPR (.3-.0) is the contents of the low-order nibble, and DAPR (.7-.4) the contents of the high-order  
nibble of DAPR.  
Semiconductor Group  
76  
On-Chip Peripheral Components  
If DAPR (.3-.0) or DAPR (.7-.4) = 0, the internal reference voltages correspond to the external  
reference voltages VAGND and VAREF, respectively.  
If VAINPUT > VIntAREF, the conversion result is 0FF , if VAINPUT < VIntAGDN , the conversion result is 00  
(VAINPUT is the analog input voltage).  
H
H
If the external reference voltages VAGND = 0 V and VAREF = +5 V (with respect to VSS and VCC) are  
applied, then the following internal reference voltages VIntAGND and VIntAREF shown in table 7-7 can  
be adjusted via the special function register DAPR.  
Figure 7-29  
Special Function Register DAPR (Address DA )  
H
0DA  
DAPR  
Programming of VIntAREF  
Programming of VIntAGND  
H
D/A converter program register. Each 4-bit nibble is used to program the internal reference  
voltages. Write-access to DAPR starts conversion.  
DAPR (.3-.0)  
VIntAGND = VAGND  
+
(VAREF VAGND  
)
16  
with DAPR (.3-.0) < 13;  
DAPR (.7-.4)  
16  
VIntAGND = VAGND  
+
(VAREF VAGND  
)
with DAPR (.7-.4) > 3;  
Semiconductor Group  
77  
On-Chip Peripheral Components  
Table 7-7  
Adjustable Internal Reference Voltages  
Step  
DAPR (.3-.0)  
DAPR (.7-.4)  
VIntAGND  
VIntAREF  
0
0000  
0001  
0010  
0011  
0100  
0101  
0110  
0111  
1000  
1001  
1010  
1011  
1100  
1101  
1110  
1111  
0.0  
5.0  
1
0.3125  
0.625  
0.9375  
1.25  
1.5625  
1.875  
2.1875  
2.5  
2
3
4
1.25  
5
1.5625  
1.875  
2.1875  
2.5  
6
7
8
9
2.8125  
3.125  
3.4375  
3.75  
2.8125  
3.125  
3.4375  
3.75  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
4.0625  
4.375  
4.68754  
The programmability of the internal reference voltages allows adjusting the internal voltage range  
to the range of the external analog input voltage or it may be used to increase the resolution of the  
converted analog input voltage by starting a second conversion with a compressed internal  
reference voltage range close to the previously measured analog value. Figures 7-30 and 7-31  
illustrate these applications.  
Semiconductor Group  
78  
On-Chip Peripheral Components  
Figure 7-30  
Adjusting the Internal Reference Voltages within Range of the External Analog Input  
Voltages  
Figure 7-31  
Increasing the Resolution by a Second Conversion  
Semiconductor Group  
79  
On-Chip Peripheral Components  
The external reference voltage supply need only be applied when the A/D converter is used,  
otherwise the pins VAREF and VAGND may be left unconnected. The reference voltage supply has to  
meet some requirements concerning the level of VAGND and VAREF and the output impedance of the  
supply voltage (see also "A/D Converter Characteristics" in the data sheet).  
– The voltage VAREF must meet the following specification:  
V
AREF = VCC ± 5 %  
– The voltage VAGND must meet a similar specification:  
AGND = VSS ± 0.2 V  
V
– The differential output impedance of the analog reference supply voltage should be less than  
1 kΩ  
lf the above mentioned operating conditions are not met the accuracy of the converter may be  
decreased.  
Furthermore, the analog input voltage VAINPUT must not exceed the range from (VAGND – 0.2 V) to  
(VAREF + 0.2 V). Otherwise, a static input current might result at the corresponding analog input  
which will also affect the accuracy of the other input channels.  
7.4.3  
A/D Converter Timing  
A conversion is started by writing into special function register DAPR. A write-to-DAPR will start a  
new conversion even if a conversion is currently in progress. The conversion begins with the next  
machine cycle and the busy flag BSY will be set.  
The conversion procedure is divided into three parts:  
Load time (tL):  
During this time the analog input capacitance CI (see data sheet) must be loaded to the analog input  
voltage level. The external analog source needs to be strong enough to source the current to load  
the analog input capacitance during the load time. This causes some restrictions for the impedance  
of the analog source. For a typical application the value of the impedance should be less than  
approx. 5 k.  
Sample time (tS):  
During this time the internal capacitor array is connected to the selected analog input channel. The  
sample time includes the load time which is described above. After the load time has passed the  
selected analog input must be held constant for the rest of the sample time. Otherwise the internal  
calibration of the comparator circuitry could be affected which might result in a reduced accuracy of  
the converter. However, in typical applications a voltage change of approx. 200 - 300 mV at the  
inputs during this time has no effect.  
Semiconductor Group  
80  
On-Chip Peripheral Components  
Conversion time (tC):  
The conversion time tC includes the sample and load time. Thus, tC is the total time required for one  
conversion. After the load time and sample time have elapsed, the conversion itself is performed  
during the rest of tC. In the last machine cycle the converted result is moved to ADDAT; the busy  
flag (BSY) is cleared before. The A/D converter interrupt is generated by bit IADC in register  
IRCON. IADC is already set some cycles before the result is written to ADDAT. The flag IADC is  
set before the result is available in ADDAT because the shortest possible interrupt latency time is  
taken into account in order to ensure optimal performance. Thus, the converted result appears at  
the same time in ADDAT when the first instruction of the interrupt service routine is executed.  
Similar considerations apply to the timing of the flag BSY where usually a "JB BSY,$" instruction is  
used for polling.  
lf a continuous conversion is established, the next conversion is automatically started in the  
machine cycle following the last cycle of the previous conversion.  
Figure 7-32  
Timing Diagram of an A/D Converter  
Semiconductor Group  
81  
On-Chip Peripheral Components  
7.5  
Timer 2 with Additional Compare/Capture/Reload  
The timer 2 with additional compare/capture/reload features is one of the most powerful peripheral  
units of the SAB 80(C)515. lt is used for all kinds of digital signal generation and event capturing  
like pulse generation, pulse width modulation, pulse width measuring etc.  
This allows various automotive control applications (ignition/injection-control, anti-lock-brake ) as  
well as industrial applications (DC-, three-phase AC- and stepper-motor control, frequency  
generation, digital-to-analog conversion, process control …).  
Please note that this timer is not equivalent to timer 2 of the SAB 80(C)52 (see section 7.5.1 ).  
Timer 2 in combination with the compare/capture/reload registers allows the following modes:  
Compare: up to 4 PWM signals with 65535 steps at maximum, and 1 µsec resolution  
Capture:  
Reload:  
up to 4 high speed inputs with 1 µsec resolution  
modulation of timer 2 cycle time  
The block diagram in figure 7-33 a) shows the general configuration of timer 2 with the additional  
compare/capture/reload registers.  
The corresponding port functions are listed in table 7-8.  
Table 7-9 shows the additional special function registers of timer 2.  
Semiconductor Group  
82  
On-Chip Peripheral Components  
Figure 7-33 a)  
Timer 2 Block Diagram  
Semiconductor Group  
83  
On-Chip Peripheral Components  
Figure 7-33 b)  
Timer 2 in Reload Mode  
Table 7-8  
Alternate Port Functions of Timer 2  
Pin Symbol  
Input (I)  
Function  
Output (O)  
P1.7/T2  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
External count or gate input to timer 2  
External reload trigger input  
P1.5/T2EX  
P1.3/INT6/CC3  
P1.2/INT5/CC2  
P1.1/INT4/CC1  
P1.0/INT3/CC0  
Comp. output/capture input for CC register 3  
Comp. output/capture input for CC register 2  
Comp. output/capture input for CC register 1  
Comp. output/capture input for CRC register  
Semiconductor Group  
84  
On-Chip Peripheral Components  
Table 7-9  
Additional Special Function Registers of Timer 2  
Symbol  
Description  
Address  
CCEN  
CCH1  
CCH2  
CCH3  
CCL1  
CCL2  
CCL3  
CRCH  
CRCL  
IRCON  
TH2  
Comp./capture enable reg.  
Comp./capture reg. 1, high byte  
Comp./capture reg. 2, high byte  
Comp./capture reg. 3, high byte  
Comp./capture reg. 1, low byte  
Comp./capture reg. 2, low byte  
Comp./capture reg. 3, low byte  
Com./rel./capt. reg., high byte  
Com./rel./capt. reg., low byte  
Interrupt control register  
0C1  
H
0C3  
H
0C5  
H
0C7  
H
0C2  
H
0C4  
H
0C6  
H
0CB  
H
0CA  
H
0C0  
H
Timer 2, high byte  
Timer 2, low byte  
Timer 2 control register  
0CD  
H
TL2  
T2CON  
0CC  
H
0C8  
H
7.5.1  
Timer 2  
The timer 2, which is a 16-bit-wide register, can operate as timer, event counter, or gated timer.  
Timer Mode  
In timer function, the count rate is derived from the oscillator frequency. A 2:1 prescaler offers the  
possibility of selecting a count rate of 1/12 or 1/24 of the oscillator frequency. Thus, the 16-bit timer  
register (consisting of TH2 and TL2) is either incremented in every machine cycle or in every second  
machine cycle. The prescaler is selected by bit T2PS in special function register T2CON (see  
figure 7-35). lf T2PS is cleared, the input frequency is 1/12 of the oscillator frequency; if T2PS is  
set, the 2:1 prescaler gates 1/24 of the oscillator frequency to the timer.  
Gated Timer Mode  
In gated timer function, the external input pin T2 (P1.7) functions as a gate to the input of timer 2. lf  
T2 is high, the internal clock input is gated to the timer. T2 = 0 stops the counting procedure. This  
will facilitate pulse width measurements. The external gate signal is sampled once every machine  
cycle (for the exact port timing, please refer to section 7.1 "Parallel I/O").  
Semiconductor Group  
85  
On-Chip Peripheral Components  
Event Counter Mode  
In the counter function, the timer 2 is incremented in response to a 1-to-0 transition at its  
corresponding external input pin T2 (P1.7). In this function, the external input is sampled every  
machine cycle. When the sampled inputs show a high in one cycle and a low in the next cycle, the  
count is incremented. The new count value appears in the timer register in the cycle following the  
one in which the transition was detected. Since it takes two machine cycles (24 oscillator periods)  
to recognize a 1-to-0 transition, the maximum count rate is 1/24 of the oscillator frequency. There  
are no restrictions on the duty cycle of the external input signal, but to ensure that a given level is  
sampled at least once before it changes, it must be held for at least one full machine cycle (see also  
section 7.1 "Parallel I/O" for the exact sample time at the port pin P1.7).  
Note:  
The prescaler must be off for proper counter operation of timer 2, i.e. T2PS must be 0.  
In either case, no matter whether timer 2 is configured as timer, event counter, or gated timer, a  
rolling-over of the count from all 1’s to all 0’s sets the timer overflow flag TF2 (bit 6 in SFR IRCON,  
interrupt request control) which can generate an interrupt.  
lf TF2 is used to generate a timer overflow interrupt, the request flag must be cleared by the interrupt  
service routine as it could be necessary to check whether it was the TF2 flag or the external reload  
request flag EXF2 which requested the interrupt (for EXF2 see below). Both request flags cause the  
program to branch to the same vector address.  
The input clock to timer 2 is selected by bits T2I0, T2I1, and T2PS as listed in figure 7-35.  
Reload of Timer 2 (see figure 7-33 b) )  
The reload mode for timer 2 is selected by bits T2R0 and T2R1 in SFR T2CON as listed in  
figure 7-35. Two reload modes are selectable:  
In mode 0, when timer 2 rolls over from all 1’s to all 0’s, it not only sets TF2 but also causes the  
timer 2 registers to be loaded with the 16-bit value in the CRC register, which is preset by software.  
The reload will happen in the same machine cycle in which TF2 is set, thus overwriting the count  
value 0000 .  
H
In mode 1, a 16-bit reload from the CRC register is caused by a negative transition at the  
corresponding input pin T2EX/P1.5. In addition, this transition will set flag EXF2, if bit EXEN2 in  
SFR IEN1 is set. lf the timer 2 interrupt is enabled, setting EXF2 will generate an interrupt (more  
about interrupts in section 8). The external input pin T2EX is sampled in every machine cycle. When  
the sampling shows a high in one cycle and a low in the next cycle, a transition will be recognized.  
The reload of timer 2 registers will then take place in the cycle following the one in which the  
transition was detected.  
Semiconductor Group  
86  
On-Chip Peripheral Components  
Figure 7-34  
Special Function Register T2CON  
0CF  
0CE  
0CD  
0CC  
0CB  
0CA  
0C9  
0C8  
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
0C8  
T2PS I3FR  
I2FR T2R1 T2R0 T2CM T2I1  
T2I0 T2CON  
H
These bits are not used in combination with timer 2.  
Timer 2 control register. Bit-addressable register which controls timer 2 function and compare mode  
of registers CRC, CC1 to CC3.  
Bit  
Symbol  
T2I1  
T2I0 Timer 2 input selection  
0
0
0
1
No input selected, timer 2 stops  
Timer function  
input frequency = fOSC/12 (T2PS = 0) or fOSC/24 (T2PS = 1)  
Counter function, external input signal at pin T2/P1.7  
Gated timer function, input controlled by pin T2/P1.7  
1
1
0
1
T2R1  
T2R0 Timer 2 reload mode selection  
0
1
1
X
0
1
Reload disabled  
Mode 0: auto-reload upon timer 2 overflow (TF2)  
Mode 1: reload upon falling edge at pin T2EX/P1.5  
T2CM  
I3FR  
Compare mode bit for registers CRC, CC1 through CC3. When set,  
compare mode 1 is selected. T2CM = 0 selects compare mode 0.  
External interrupt 3 falling/rising edge flag, also used for capture function  
in combination with register CRC (see section 7.5.3).  
If set, capture to register to CRC (if enabled) will occur on a positive  
transition at pin P1.0/INT3/CC0. If I3FR is cleared, capture will occur on  
a negative transition.  
T2PS  
Prescaler select bit. When set, timer 2 is clocked in the "timer" or "gated  
timer" function with 1/24 of the oscillator frequency.  
T2PS = 0 gates fOSC/12 to timer 2. T2PS must be 0 for the counter  
operation of timer 2.  
Semiconductor Group  
87  
On-Chip Peripheral Components  
7.5.2  
Compare Function of Registers CRC, CC1 to CC3  
The compare function of a timer/register combination can be described as follows. The 16-bit value  
stored in a compare/capture register is compared with the contents of the timer register. lf the count  
value in the timer register matches the stored value, an appropriate output signal is generated at a  
corresponding port pin, and an interrupt is requested.  
The contents of a compare register can be regarded as ’time stamp’ at which a dedicated output  
reacts in a predefined way (either with a positive or negative transition). Variation of this ’time stamp’  
somehow changes the wave of a rectangular output signal at a port pin. This may - as a variation  
of the duty cycle of a periodic signal - be used for pulse width modulation as well as for a continually  
controlled generation of any kind of square wave forms. In the case of the SAB 80(C)515, two  
compare modes are implemented to cover a wide range of possible applications.  
The compare modes 0 and 1 are selected by bit T2CM in special function register T2CON (see  
figure 7-34). In both compare modes, the new value arrives at the port pin 1 within the same  
machine cycle in which the internal compare signal is activated.  
The four registers CRC, CC1 to CC3 are multifunctional as they additionally provide a capture,  
compare or reload capability (the CRC register only, see section 7.5.1). A general selection of the  
function is done in register CCEN (see figure 7-40). Please note that the compare interrupt CC0  
can be programmed to be negative or positive transition activated. The internal compare signal (not  
the output signal at the port pin!) is active as long as the timer 2 contents is equal to the one of the  
appropriate compare registers, and it has a rising and a falling edge. Thus, when using the CRC  
register, it can be selected whether an interrupt should be caused when the compare signal goes  
active or inactive, depending on bit I3FR in T2CON. For the CC registers 1 to 3 an interrupt is  
always requested when the compare signal goes active (see figure 7-36).  
7.5.2.1 Compare Mode 0  
In mode 0, upon matching the timer and compare register contents, the output signal changes from  
low to high. lt goes back to a low level on timer overflow. As long as compare mode 0 is enabled,  
the appropriate output pin is controlled by the timer circuit only, and not by the user. Writing to the  
port will have no effect. Figure 7-35 shows a functional diagram of a port latch in compare mode 0.  
The port latch is directly controlled by the two signals timer overflow and compare. The input line  
from the internal bus and the write-to-latch line are disconnected when compare mode 0 is enabled.  
Compare mode 0 is ideal for generating pulse width modulated output signals, which in turn can be  
used for digital-to-analog conversion via a filter network or by the controlled device itself (e.g. the  
inductance of a DC or AC motor). Mode 0 may also be used for providing output clocks with initially  
defined period and duty cycle. This is the mode which needs the least CPU time. Once set up, the  
output goes on oscillating without any CPU intervention. Figure 7-36 and 7-37 illustrate the function  
of compare mode 0.  
Semiconductor Group  
88  
On-Chip Peripheral Components  
Figure 7-35  
Port Latch in Compare Mode 0  
Figure 7-36  
Timer 2 with Registers CCx in Compare Mode 0  
(CCx stands for CRC, CC1 to CC3; IEXx stands for IEX3 to IEX6)  
Semiconductor Group  
89  
On-Chip Peripheral Components  
Timer Count = FFFF  
H
Timer Count =  
Compare Value  
Contents  
of  
~
~
Timer 2  
Timer Count = Reload Value  
Interrupt can be generated  
on overflow  
Compare  
Output  
(P1.x/CCx)  
MCT01906  
Interrupt can be generated  
on compare-match  
Figure 7-37  
Function of Compare Mode 0  
Modulation Range in Compare Mode 0  
Generally it can be said that for every PWM generation in compare mode 0 with n-bit wide compare  
n
registers there are 2 different settings for the duty cycle. Starting with a constant low level (0% duty  
cycle) as the first setting, the maximum possible duty cycle then would be  
(1 – 1/2n) x 100%  
This means that a variation of the duty cycle from 0% to real 100% can never be reached if the  
compare register and timer register have the same length. There is always a spike which is as long  
as the timer clock period.  
This "spike" may either appear when the compare register is set to the reload value (limiting the  
lower end of the modulation range) or it may occur at the end of a timer period. In a timer 2/CCx  
register configuration in compare mode 0 this spike is divided into two halves: one at the beginning  
when the contents of the compare register is equal to the reload value of the timer; the other half  
when the compare register is equal to the maximum value of the timer register (here: 0FFFF ).  
H
Please refer to figure 7-38 where the maximum and minimum duty cycle of a compare output signal  
is illustrated. Timer 2 is incremented with the machine clock (fOSC/12), thus at 12-MHz operational  
frequency, these spikes are both approx. 500 ns long.  
Semiconductor Group  
90  
On-Chip Peripheral Components  
Figure 7-38  
Modulation Range of a PWM Signal, Generated with a  
Timer 2/CCx Register Combination in Compare Mode 0  
The following example shows how to calculate the modulation range for a PWM signal. To calculate  
with reasonable numbers, a reduction of the resolution to 8-bit is used. Otherwise (for the maximum  
resolution of 16-bit) the modulation range would be so severely limited that it would be negligible.  
Example:  
Timer 2 in auto-reload mode; contents of reload register CRC = 0FF00  
H
1
Restriction of modulation range =  
x 100% = 0.195%  
256 x 2  
This leads to a variation of the duty cycle from 0.195% to 99.805% for a timer 2/CCx register  
configuration when 8 of 16 bits are used.  
Semiconductor Group  
91  
On-Chip Peripheral Components  
7.5.2.2 Compare Mode 1  
In compare mode 1, the software adaptively determines the transition of the output signal. lt is  
commonly used when output signals are not related to a constant signal period (as in a standard  
PWM generation) but must be controlled very precisely with high resolution and without jitter. In  
compare mode 1, both transitions of a signal can be controlled. Compare outputs in this mode can  
be regarded as high speed outputs which are independent of the CPU activity.  
lf mode 1 is enabled, and the software writes to the appropriate output latch at the port, the new  
value will not appear at the output pin until the next compare match occurs. Thus, one can choose  
whether the output signal is to make a new transition (1-to-0 or 0-to-1, depending on the actual pin-  
level) or should keep its old value at the time the timer 2 count matches the stored compare value.  
Figure 7-39 shows a functional diagram of a timer/compare register/port latch configuration in  
compare mode 1. In this function, the port latch consists of two separate latches. The upper latch  
(which acts as a "shadow latch") can be written under software control, but its value will only be  
transferred to the output latch (and thus to the port pin) in response to a compare match.  
Note that the double latch structure is transparent as long as the internal compare signal is active.  
While the compare signal is active, a write operation to the port will then change both latches. This  
may become important when driving timer 2 with a slow external clock. In this case the compare  
signal could be active for many machine cycles in which the CPU could unintentionally change the  
contents of the port latch. For details see also section 7.5.2.3 "Using Interrupts in Combination with  
the Compare Function".  
A read-modify-write instruction (see section 7.1) will read the user-controlled "shadow latch" and  
write the modified value back to this "shadow-latch". A standard read instruction will - as usual - read  
the pin of the corresponding compare output.  
Semiconductor Group  
92  
On-Chip Peripheral Components  
Figure 7-39  
Timer 2 with Registers CCx in Compare Mode 1  
(CCx stands for CRC, CC1 to CC3; IEXx stands for IEX3 to IEX6)  
Semiconductor Group  
93  
On-Chip Peripheral Components  
Figure 7-40  
Special Function Register CCEN  
0C1 COCAH3 COCAL3 COCAH2 COCAI2 COCAH1 COCAL1 COCAH0 COCAL0 CCEN  
H
Compare/capture enable register selects compare or capture function for register CRC, CC1 to  
CC3.  
Bit  
Function  
COCAH0  
COCAL0 Compare/capture mode for CRC register  
0
0
0
1
Compare/capture disabled  
Capture on falling/rising edge at pin  
P1.0/INT3/CC0  
1
1
0
1
Compare enabled  
Capture on write operation into register CRCL  
COCAH1  
COCAL1 Compare/capture mode for CC register 1  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Compare/capture disabled  
Capture on rising edge at pin P1.1/INT4/CC1  
Compare enabled  
Capture on write operation into register CCL1  
COCAH2  
COCAL2 Compare/capture mode for CC register 2  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Compare/capture disabled  
Capture on rising edge at pin P1.2/INT5/CC2  
Compare enabled  
Capture on write operation into register CCL2  
COCAH3  
COCAL3 Compare/capture mode for CC register 3  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Compare/capture disabled  
Capture on rising edge at pin P1.3/INT6/CC3  
Compare enabled  
Capture on write operation into register CCL3  
7.5.2.3 Using Interrupts in Combination with the Compare Function  
The compare service of registers CRC, CC1, CC2 and CC3 is assigned to alternate output functions  
at port pins P1.0 to P1.3. Another option of these pins is that they can be used as external interrupt  
inputs. However, when using the port lines as compare outputs then the input line from the port pin  
to the interrupt system is disconnected (but the pin’s level can still be read under software control).  
Thus, a change of the pin’s level will not cause a setting of the corresponding interrupt flag. In this  
case, the interrupt input is directly connected to the (internal) compare signal thus providing a  
compare interrupt.  
Semiconductor Group  
94  
On-Chip Peripheral Components  
The compare interrupt can be used very effectively to change the contents of the compare registers  
or to determine the level of the port outputs for the next "compare match". The principle is, that the  
internal compare signal (generated at a match between timer count and register contents) not only  
manipulates the compare output but also sets the corresponding interrupt request flag. Thus, the  
current task of the CPU is interrupted - of course provided the priority of the compare interrupt is  
higher than the present task priority - and the corresponding interrupt service routine is called. This  
service routine then sets up all the necessary parameters for the next compare event.  
Some advantages in using compare interrupts:  
Firstly, there is no danger of unintentional overwriting a compare register before a match has been  
reached. This could happen when the CPU writes to the compare register without knowing about  
the actual timer 2 count.  
Secondly, and this is the most interesting advantage of the compare feature, the output pin is  
exclusively controlled by hardware therefore completely independent from any service delay which  
in real time applications could be disastrous. The compare interrupt in turn is not sensitive to such  
delays since it loads the parameters for the next event. This in turn is supposed to happen after a  
sufficient space of time.  
Please note two special cases where a program using compare interrupts could show a "surprising"  
behavior:  
The first configuration has already been mentioned in the description of compare mode 1. The fact  
that the compare interrupts are transition activated becomes important when driving timer 2 with a  
slow external clock. In this case it should be carefully considered that the compare signal is active  
as long as the timer 2 count is equal to the contents of the corresponding compare register, and that  
the compare signal has a rising and a falling edge. Furthermore, the "shadow latches" used in  
compare mode 1 are transparent while the compare signal is active.  
Thus, with a slow input clock for timer 2, the comparator signal is active for a long time (= high  
number of machine cycles) and therefore a fast interrupt controlled reload of the compare register  
could not only change the "shadow latch" - as probably intended - but also the output buffer.  
When using the CRC , you can select whether an interrupt should be generated when the compare  
signal goes active or inactive, depending on the status of bit I3FR in T2CON (see figure 8-5).  
Initializing the interrupt to be negative transition triggered is advisive in the above case. Then the  
compare signal is already inactive and any write access to the port latch just changes the contents  
of the "shadow-latch".  
Please note that for CC registers 1 to 3 an interrupt is always requested when the compare signal  
goes active.  
Semiconductor Group  
95  
On-Chip Peripheral Components  
The second configuration which should be noted is when compare function is combined with  
negative transition activated interrupts. lf the port latch of port P1.0 contains a 1, the interrupt  
request flags IEX2 will immediately be set after enabling the compare mode for the CRC register.  
The reason is that first the external interrupt input is controlled by the pin’s level. When the compare  
option is enabled the interrupt logic input is switched to the internal compare signal, which carries  
a low level when no true comparison is detected. So the interrupt logic sees a 1-to-0 edge and sets  
the interrupt request flag.  
An unintentional generation of an interrupt during compare initialization can be prevented if the  
request flag is cleared by software after the compare is activated and before the external interrupt  
is enabled.  
7.5.3  
Capture Function  
Each of the three compare/capture registers CC1 to CC3 and the CRC register can be used to latch  
the current 16-bit value of the timer 2 registers TL2 and TH2. Two different modes are provided for  
this function. In mode 0, an external event latches the timer 2 contents to a dedicated capture  
register. In mode 1, a capture will occur upon writing to the low order byte of the dedicated 16-bit  
capture register. This mode is provided to allow the software to read the timer 2 contents "on-the-  
fly".  
In mode 0, the external event causing a capture is  
– for CC registers 1 to 3: a positive transition at pins CC1 to CC3 of port 1  
– for the CRC register: a positive or negative transition at the corresponding pin, depending  
on the status of the bit I3FR in SFR T2CON. lf the edge flag is  
cleared, a capture occurs in response to a negative transition; if the  
edge flag is set a capture occurs in response to a positive transition  
at pin P1.0/INT3/ CC0.  
In both cases the appropriate port 1 pin is used as input and the port latch must be programmed to  
contain a one (1). The external input is sampled in every machine cycle. When the sampled input  
shows a low (high) level in one cycle and a high (low) in the next cycle, a transition is recognized.  
The timer 2 contents is latched to the appropriate capture register in the cycle following the one in  
which the transition was identified.  
In mode 0 a transition at the external capture inputs of registers CC0 to CC3 will also set the  
corresponding external interrupt request flags IEX3 to IEX6. lf the interrupts are enabled, an  
external capture signal will cause the CPU to vector to the appropriate interrupt service routine.  
In mode 1 a capture occurs in response to a write instruction to the low order byte of a capture  
register. The write-to-register signal (e.g. write-to-CRCL) is used to initiate a capture. The value  
written to the dedicated capture register is irrelevant for this function. The timer 2 contents will be  
latched into the appropriate capture register in the cycle following the write instruction. In this mode  
no interrupt request will be generated.  
Semiconductor Group  
96  
On-Chip Peripheral Components  
Figures 7-41 and 7-42 show functional diagrams of the capture function of timer 2. Figure 7-41  
illustrates the operation of the CRC register, while figure 7-42 shows the operation of the compare/  
capture registers 1 to 3.  
The two capture modes can be established individually for each capture register by bits in SFR  
CCEN (compare/capture enable register). That means, in contrast to the compare modes, it is  
possible to simultaneously select mode 0 for one capture register and mode 1 for another register.  
The bit positions and functions of CCEN are listed in figure 7-40.  
Figure 7-41  
Capture with Register CRC  
Semiconductor Group  
97  
On-Chip Peripheral Components  
Figure 7-42  
Capture with Registers CC1 to CC3  
7.6  
Power Saving Modes  
For significantly reducing power consumption, the SAB 80(C)515/80(C)535 provides two Power  
Saving Modes:  
– The Power-Down Mode  
Operation of the component stops completely, the oscillator is turned off. Only the internal  
RAM is supplied with a very low standby current.  
– The Idle Mode (SAB 80C515/80C535 only)  
The CPU is gated off from the oscillator. All peripherals are further supplied by the oscillator  
clock and are able to do their jobs.  
These modes are described separatly for each component in the following sections.  
There are numerous applications which require high system security and at the same time reliability  
in electrically noisy environments. In such applications unintentional entering of the power saving  
modes must be absolutely avoided. A power saving mode would reduce the controller’s perfomance  
(in case of idle mode) or even stop each operation (in case of power-down mode). This situation  
might be fatal for the system. Such critical applications often use the watchdog timer to prevent the  
system from program upsets. Then accidental entering of the power saving modes would even stop  
the watchdog timer and would circumvent the task of system reliability.  
The SAB 80C515/80C535 provides software and hardware protection against accidental entering  
as described above (see chapter 7.6.2).  
Semiconductor Group  
98  
On-Chip Peripheral Components  
7.6.1  
Power Saving Modes of the SAB 80515/80535  
The SAB 80515/80535 allows a reduction of the power consumption using the power-down mode.  
7.6.1.1 Power-Down Mode of the SAB 80515/80535  
The power-down mode in the SAB 80515/80535 allows a reduction of VCC , to zero while saving 40  
bytes of the on-chip RAM through a backup supply connected to the VPD pin. In the following, the  
terms VCC and VPD are used to specify the voltages on pin VCC and pin VPD, respectively.  
lf VCC > VPD , the 40 bytes are supplied from VCC . VPD may then below. lf VCC < VPD , the current for  
the 40 bytes is drawn from VPD . The addresses of these backup-powered RAM locations range from  
88 to 127 (58 to 7F ). The current drawn from the backup power supply is typically 1 mA, max. 3  
H
H
mA.  
To utilize this feature, the user’s system - upon detecting an imminent power failure - would interrupt  
the processor in some manner to transfer relevant data to the 40-byte on-chip RAM and enable the  
backup power supply to the VPD pin. Then a reset should be accomplished before VCC falls below  
its operating limit. When power returns, a power-on reset should be accomplished, and the backup  
supply needs to stay on long enough to resume normal operation. Figure 7-43 illustrates the timing  
upon a power failure.  
Figure 7-43  
Reset and RAM Backup Power Timing of the SAB 80515/80535  
Semiconductor Group  
99  
On-Chip Peripheral Components  
7.6.2  
Power Saving Modes of the SAB 80515/80535  
Dlfferences between the Power-Down Modes of the SAB 80C515/80C535 and the SAB 80515/  
80535  
The power-down mode of the SAB 80515/80535 allows retention of 40 bytes on-chip RAM through  
a backup supply connected to the VPD pin.  
The ACMOS versions SAB 80C515/80C535 have the following additional features:  
– The same power supply (pin VCC) for active, power-down (retention of the whole int. RAM  
area), and idle mode.  
– An extra pin (PE) that allows enabling/disabling of the power-saving modes.  
– A software protection that enables the power saving modes via special function register  
PCON (Power Control Register).  
Hardware Enable for the Use of the Power Saving Modes  
To provide power saving modes together with effective protection against unintentional entering of  
these modes, the SAB 80C515/80C535 has an extra pin for disabling the use of the power saving  
modes. This pin is called PE (power saving enable), and its function is as follows:  
PE = 1 (logic high level): Use of the power saving modes is not possible. The instruction  
sequences used for entering these modes will not affect the  
normal operation of the device.  
PE = 0 (logic low level): All power saving modes can be activated as described in the following  
sections.  
When left unconnected, the pin PE is pulled to high level by a weak internal pullup. This is done to  
provide system protection by default.  
In addition to the hardware enable/disable of the power saving modes, a double-instruction  
sequence which is described in the corresponding sections is necessary to enter power-down and  
idle mode. The combination of all these safety precautions provides a maximum of system  
protection.  
Application Example for Switching Pin PE  
For most applications in noisy environments, certain components external to the chip are used to  
give warning of a power failure or a turn off of the power supply.  
These circuits could be used to control the PE pin. The possible steps to go into power-down mode  
could then be as follows:  
– A power-fail signal forces the controller to go into a high priority interrupt routine. This interrupt  
routine saves the actual program status. At the same time pin PE is pulled low by the power-  
fail signal.  
– Finally the controller enters power-down mode by executing the relevant double-instruction  
sequence.  
Semiconductor Group  
100  
On-Chip Peripheral Components  
7.6.2.1 Power-Down Mode of the SAB 80C515/80C535  
In the power-down mode, the on-chip oscillator is stopped. Therefore, all functions are stopped,  
only the contents of the on-chip RAM and the SFR’s are held. The port pins controlled by their port  
latches output the values that are held by their SFR’S. The port pins which serve the alternate  
output functions show the values they had at the end of the last cycle of the instruction which  
initiated the power-down mode; when enabled, the clockout signal (P1.6/CLKOUT) will stop at low  
level. ALE and PSEN are held at logic low level (see table 7-10).  
lf the power-down mode is to be used, the pin PE must be held low. Entering the power-down mode  
is done by two consecutive instructions immediately following each other. The first instruction has  
to set the flag bit PDE (PCON.1) and must not set bit PDS (PCON.6). The following instruction has  
to set the start bit PDS (PCON.6) and must not set bit PDE (PCON.1). The hardware ensures that  
a concurrent setting of both bits, PDE and PDS, will not initiate the power-down mode. Bit PDE and  
PDS will automatically be cleared after having been set and the value shown when reading one of  
these bits is always zero (0). Figure 7-44 shows the special function register PCON. This double-  
instruction sequence is implemented to minimize the chance of unintentionall entering the power-  
down mode, which could possibly "freeze" the chip’s activity in an undesired status.  
Note that PCON is not a bit-addressable register, so the above mentioned sequence for entering  
the power-down mode is composed of byte handling instructions.  
The following instruction sequence may serve as an example:  
ORL  
PCON,#00000010B  
;Set bit PDE,  
;bit PDS must not be set  
;Set bit PDS,  
ORL  
PCON,#01000000B  
;bit PDE must not be set  
The instruction that sets bit PDS is the last instruction executed before going into power-down  
mode. lf idle mode and power-down mode are invoked simultaneously, the power-down mode takes  
precedence.  
The only exit from power-down mode is a hardware reset. Reset will redefine all SFR’S, but will not  
change the contents of the internal RAM.  
In the power-down mode, VCC can be reduced to minimize power consumption. Care must be taken,  
however, to ensure that VCC is not reduced before the power-down mode is invoked, and that VCC  
is restored to its normal operating level before the power-down mode is terminated. The reset signal  
that terminates the power-down mode also frees the oscillator. The reset should not be activated  
before VCC is restored to its normal operating level and must be held active long enough to allow the  
oscillator to restart and stabilize (similar to power-on reset).  
Semiconductor Group  
101  
On-Chip Peripheral Components  
7.6.2.2 Idle Mode of the SAB 80C515/80C535  
In idle mode the oscillator of the SAB 80C515/80C535 continues to run, but the CPU is gated off  
from the clock signal. However, the interrupt system, the serial channel, the A/D converter and all  
timers, except for the watchdog timer, are further provided with the clock. The CPU status is  
preserved in its entirety: the stack pointer, program counter, program status word, accumulator, and  
all other registers maintain their data during idle mode.  
The reduction of power consumption, which can be achieved by this feature, depends on the  
number of peripherals running. lf all timers are stopped and the A/D converter and the serial  
interface are not running, maximum power reduction can be achieved. This state is also the test  
condition for the idle ICC (see the DC characteristics in the data sheet).  
Thus, the user has to make sure that the right peripheral continues to run or is stopped, respectively,  
during idle. Also, the state of all port pins - either the pins controlled by their latches or controlled by  
their secondary functions - depends on the status of the controller when entering idle.  
Normally the port pins hold the logical state they had at the time idle was activated. lf some pins are  
programmed to serve their alternate functions they still continue to output during idle if the assigned  
function is on. This applies for the compare outputs as well as for the system clock output signal  
and the serial interface in case the latter could not finish reception or transmission during normal  
operation. The control signals ALE and PSEN are held at logic high levels (see table 7-10).  
During idle, as in normal operating mode, the ports can be used as inputs. Thus, a capture or reload  
operation as well as an A/D conversion can be triggered, the timers can be used to count external  
events and external interrupts can be detected.  
Semiconductor Group  
102  
On-Chip Peripheral Components  
Table 7-10  
Status of External Pins During Idle and Power-Down Mode  
Outputs  
Last Instruction Executed from  
Internal Code Memory  
Last Instruction Executed from  
External Code Memory  
Idle  
Power-down  
Idle  
Power-down  
ALE  
High  
High  
Data  
Low  
Low  
Data  
High  
High  
Float  
Low  
Low  
Float  
PSEN  
Port 0  
Port 1  
Data/alternate  
outputs  
Data/  
last output  
Data/alternate  
outputs  
Data/  
last output  
Port 2  
Port 3  
Data  
Data  
Address  
Data  
Data/alternate  
outputs  
Data/  
last output  
Data/alternate  
outputs  
Data/  
last output  
Port 4  
Port 5  
Data  
Data  
Data  
Data  
Data  
Data  
Data  
Data  
The watchdog timer is the only peripheral which is automatically stopped during idle. The idle mode  
makes it possible to "freeze" the processor’s status for a certain time or until an external event  
causes the controller to go back into normal operating mode. Since the watchdog timer is stopped  
during idle mode, this useful feature of the SAB 80C515/80C535 is provided even if the watchdog  
function is used simultaneously.  
lf the idle mode is to be used the pin PE must be held low. Entering the idle mode is to be done by  
two consecutive instructions immediately following each other. The first instruction has to set the  
flag bit IDLE (PCON.0) and must not set bit IDLS (PCON.5), the following instruction has to set the  
start bit IDLS (PCON.5) and must not set bit IDLE (PCON.0). The hardware ensures that a  
concurrent setting of both bits, IDLE and IDLS will not initiate the idle mode. Bits IDLE and IDLS will  
automatically be cleared after having been set. lt one of these register bits is read the value shown  
is zero (0). Figure 7-44 shows special function register PCON. This double-instruction sequence is  
implemented to minimize the chance of unintentionally entering the idle mode.  
Note that PCON is not a bit-addressable register, so the above mentioned sequence for entering  
the idle mode is to be done by byte handling instructions.  
Semiconductor Group  
103  
On-Chip Peripheral Components  
The following instruction sequence may serve as an exemple:  
ORL  
PCON,#00000001B  
;Set bit IDLE,  
;bit IDLS must not be set  
ORL  
PCON,#00100000B  
;Set bit IDLS,  
;bit IDLE must not be set  
The instruction that sets bit IDLS is the last instruction executed before going into idle mode.  
Terminating the Idle Mode  
– The idle mode can be terminated by activation of any enabled interrupt. The CPU operation  
is resumed, the interrupt will be serviced and the next instruction to be executed after the RETI  
instruction will be the one following the instruction that set the bit IDLS.  
– The other possibility of terminating the idle mode is a hardware reset. Since the oscillator is  
still running, the hardware reset is held active for only two machine cycles for a complete  
reset.  
Figure 7-44  
Special Function Register PCON (Address 87 ) of the SAB 80C515/80C535  
H
87  
SMOD PDS  
IDLS  
GF1  
GF0  
PDE  
IDLE PCON  
H
These bits are not used in controlling the power saving modes.  
Bit  
Function  
PDS  
Power-down start bit. The instruction that sets the PDS flag bit is the last  
instruction before entering the power-down mode.  
IDLS  
IDLE start bit. The instruction that sets the IDSL flag bit is the last  
instruction before entering the idle mode.  
GF1  
GF0  
PDE  
General purpose flag  
General purpose flag  
Power-down enable bit. When set, starting the power-down mode is  
enabled.  
IDLE  
Idle mode enable bit. When set, starting the idle mode is enabled.  
Semiconductor Group  
104  
On-Chip Peripheral Components  
7.7  
Watchdog Timer  
As a means of graceful recovery from software or hardware upset a watchdog timer is provided in  
the SAB 80(C)515/80(C)535. lf the software fails to clear the watchdog timer at least every  
65532 µs, an internal hardware reset will be initiated. The software can be designed such that the  
watchdog times out if the program does not progress properly. The watchdog will also time out if  
the software error was due to hardware-related problems. This prevents the controller from  
malfunctioning for longer than 65 ms if a 12-MHz oscillator is used.  
The watchdog timer is a 16-bit counter which is incremented once every machine cycle. After an  
external reset the watchdog timer is disabled and cleared to 0000 . The counter is started by  
H
setting bit SWDT (bit 6 in SFR IEN1). After having been started, the bit WDTS (watchdog timer  
status, bit 6 in SFR IP0) is set. Note that the watchdog timer cannot be stopped by software. lt can  
only be cleared to 0000 by first setting bit WDT (IEN0.6) and with the next instruction setting  
H
SWDT. Bit WDT will automatically be cleared during the second machine cycle after having been  
set. For this reason, setting SWDT bit has to be a one cycle instruction (e.g. SETB SWDT). This  
double instruction clearing of the watchdog timer was implemented to minimize the chance of  
unintentionally clearing the watchdog. To prevent the watchdog from overflowing, it must be cleared  
periodically.  
Starting the watchdog timer by setting only bit SWDT does not reload the WDTREL register to the  
watchdog timer registers WDTL/WDTH. A reload occurs only by using the double instruction refresh  
sequence SETB WDT / SETB SWDT.  
lf the software fails to clear the watchdog in time, an internally generated watchdog reset is entered  
at the counter state FFFC , which lasts four machine cycles. This internal reset differs from an  
H
external reset only to the extent that the watchdog timer is not disabled. Bit WDTS (was set by  
starting WDT) allows the software to examine from which source the reset was initiated. lf it is set,  
the reset was caused by a watchdog timer overflow.  
Figure 7-45  
Special Function Register IEN0  
0AF  
0AE  
0AD  
0AC  
0AB  
0AA  
0A9  
0A8  
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
0A8  
EAL  
WDT  
ET2  
ES  
ET1  
EX1  
ET0  
EX0  
IEN0  
H
These bits are not used by the watchdog timer.  
Bit  
Function  
WDT  
Watchdog timer refresh flag.  
Set to initiate a refresh of the watchdog timer. Must be set directly before  
SWDT is set to prevent an unintentional refresh of the watchdog timer.  
WDT is reset by hardware two processor cycles after it has been set.  
Semiconductor Group  
105  
On-Chip Peripheral Components  
Figure 7-46  
Special Function Register IEN1  
0BF  
0BE  
0BD  
0BC  
0BB  
0BA  
0B9  
0B8  
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
0B8  
EXEN2 SWDT EX6  
EX5  
EX4  
EX3  
EX2 EADC IEN1  
H
These bits are not used by the watchdog timer.  
Bit  
Function  
SWDT  
Watchdog timer start/refresh flag.  
Set to activate/refresh the watchdog timer. When directly set after setting  
WDT, a watchdog timer refresh is performed. Bit SWDT is reset by  
hardware two processor cycles after it has been set.  
Figure 7-47  
Special Function Register IP0  
0A9  
WDTS IP0.5 IP0.4 IP0.3 IP0.2 IP0.1 IP0.0 IP0  
H
These bits are not used by the watchdog timer.  
Bit  
Function  
WDTS  
Watchdog timer status flag.  
Set by hardware when the watchdog timer was started.  
Can be read by software.  
Semiconductor Group  
106  
On-Chip Peripheral Components  
7.8  
Oscillator and Clock Circuit  
XTAL1 and XTAL2 are the input and output of a single-stage on-chip inverter which can be  
configured with off-chip components as a Pierce oscillator. The oscillator, in any case, drives the  
internal clock generator. The clock generator provides the internal clock signals to the chip at half  
the oscillator frequency. These signals define the internal phases, states and machine cycles, as  
described in chapter 3.  
7.8.1  
Crystal Oscillator Mode  
Figure 7-48 shows the recommended oscillator circuit.  
Figure 7-48  
Recommended Oscillator Circuit for the SAB 80(C)515/80(C)535  
In this application the on-chip oscillator is used as a crystal-controlled, positive-reactance oscillator  
(a more detailed schematic is given in figure 7-49 and 7-51). lt is operated in its fundamental  
response mode as an inductive reactor in parallel resonance with a capacitor external to the chip.  
The crystal specifications and capacitances are non-critical. In this circuit 30 pF can be used as  
single capacitance at any frequency together with a good quality crystal. A ceramic resonator can  
be used in place of the crystal in cost-critical applications. lf a ceramic resonator is used, C1 and C2  
are normally selected to be different values. We recommend consulting the manufacturer of the  
ceramic resonator for value specifications of these capacitors.  
7.8.2  
Driving for External Source  
The SAB 80(C)515/80(C)535 can be driven from an external oscillator.  
Please note that there is a difference between driving MYMOS and ACMOS devices from an  
external clock source.  
Semiconductor Group  
107  
On-Chip Peripheral Components  
7.8.2.1 Driving the SAB 80515/80535 from External Source  
For driving the SAB 80515/80535 from an external clock source, the external clock signal is to be  
applied to XTAL2. A pullup resistor is recommended to increase the noise margin, but is optional if  
the output high level of the driving gate meets the VIH1 specification of XTAL2.  
XTAL1 has to be connected to ground (see figure 7-50).  
Figure 7-49  
On-Chip Oscillator Circuitry  
Figure 7-50  
External Clock Source  
Semiconductor Group  
108  
On-Chip Peripheral Components  
7.8.2.2 Driving the SAB 80C515/80C535 from External Source  
For driving the SAB 80C515/80C535 from an external clock source, the external clock signal is to  
be applied to XTAL2, as shown in figure 7-52. A pullup resistor is recommended, but is optional if  
the output high level of the driving gate corresponds to the VIH1 specification of XTAL2.  
XTAL1 has to be left unconnected.  
Figure 7-51  
On-Chip Oscillator Circuitry  
Figure 7-52  
External Clock Source  
Semiconductor Group  
109  
On-Chip Peripheral Components  
7.9  
System Clock Output  
For peripheral devices requiring a system clock, the SAB 80(C)515/80(C)535 provides a clock  
output signal derived from the oscillator frequency as an alternate output function on pin P1.6/  
CLKOUT. lf bit CLK is set (bit 6 of special function register ADCON, see figure 7-53), a clock signal  
with 1/12 of the oscillator frequency is gated to pin P1.6/CLKOUT. To use this function the port pin  
must be programmed to a one (1), which is also the default after reset.  
Figure 7-53  
Special Function Register ADCON (Address 0D8 )  
H
0DF  
0DE  
0DD  
0DC  
0DB  
0DA  
0D9  
0D8  
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
0D8  
BD  
CLK  
BSY  
ADM  
MX2  
MX1  
MX0 ADCON  
H
These bits are not used in controlling the clock out functions.  
Bit  
Function  
CLK  
Clockout enable bit. When set, pin P1.6/CLKOUT outputs the system  
clock which is 1/12 of the oscillator frequency.  
The system clock is high during S3P1 and S3P2 of every machine cycle and low during all other  
states. Thus, the duty cycle of the clock signal is 1:6. Associated with a MOVX instruction the  
system clock coincides with the last state (S3) in which a RD or WR signal is active. A timing  
diagram of the system clock output is shown in figure 7-54.  
Semiconductor Group  
110  
On-Chip Peripheral Components  
Figure 7-54  
Timing Diagram - System Clock Output  
Semiconductor Group  
111  
Interrupt System  
8
Interrupt System  
The SAB 80C515/80C535 provides 12 interrupt sources with four priority levels.  
Five interrupts can be generated by the on-chip peripherals (i.e. timer 0, timer 1, timer 2, compare  
timer, serial interface and A/D converter), and seven interrupts may be triggered externally (see  
figure 8.1).  
8.1  
Interrupt Structure  
A common mechanism is used to generate the various interrupts, each source having its own  
request flag(s) located in a special function register (e.g. TCON, IRCON, SCON). Provided that the  
peripheral or external source meets the condition for an interrupt, the dedicated request flag is set,  
whether an interrupt is enabled or not. For example, each timer 0 overflow sets the corresponding  
request flag TF0. lf it is already set, it retains a one (1). But the interrupt is not necessarily serviced.  
Now each interrupt requested by the corresponding flag can individually be enabled or disabled by  
the enable bits in SFR’s IEN0, IEN1 (see figure 8-2, 8-3). This determines whether the interrupt will  
actually be performed. In addition, there is a global enable bit for all interrupts which, when cleared,  
disables all interrupts independent of their individual enable bits.  
Semiconductor Group  
112  
Interrupt System  
Figure 8-1 a)  
Interrupt Structure of the SAB 80(C)515/80(C)535  
Semiconductor Group  
113  
Interrupt System  
Figure 8-1 b)  
Interrupt Structure of the SAB 80(C)515/80(C)535 (cont’d)  
Semiconductor Group  
114  
Interrupt System  
Figure 8-2  
Special Function Register IEN0 (Address 0A8 )  
H
0AF  
0AE  
0AD  
0AC  
ES  
0AB  
0AA  
0A9  
0A8  
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
0A8  
EAL  
WDT  
ET2  
ET1  
EX1  
ET0  
EX0  
IEN0  
H
This bit is not used for interrupt control.  
Bit  
Function  
EX0  
Enables or disables external interrupt 0.  
If EX0 = 0, external interrupt 0 is disabled.  
ET0  
EX1  
ET1  
ES  
Enables or disables the timer 0 overflow interrupt.  
If ET0 = 0, the timer 0 interrupt is disabled.  
Enables or disables external interrupt 1.  
If EX1 = 0, external interrupt 1 is disabled.  
Enables or disables the timer 1 overflow interrupt.  
If ET1 = 0, the timer 1 interrupt is disabled.  
Enables or disables the serial channel interrupt.  
If ES = 0, the serial channel interrupt is disabled.  
ET2  
EAL  
Enables or disables the timer 2 overflow or external reload interrupt.  
If ET2 = 0, the timer 2 interrupt is disabled.  
Enables or disables all interrupts. If EAL = 0, no interrupt will be acknowledged.  
If EAL = 1, each interrupt source is individually enabled or disabled by setting or  
clearing its enable bit.  
Semiconductor Group  
115  
Interrupt System  
Figure 8-3  
Special Function Register IEN1 (Address 0B8 )  
H
0BF  
0BE  
0BD  
0BC  
0BB  
0BA  
0B9  
0B8  
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
0B8  
EXEN2 SWDT EX6  
EX5  
EX4  
EX3  
EX2 EADC IEN1  
H
This bit is not used for interrupt control.  
Bit  
Function  
EADC  
Enables or disables the A/D converter interrupt.  
If EADC = 0, the A/D converter interrupt is disabled.  
EX2  
Enables or disables external interrupt 2/capture/compare interrupt 4.  
If EX2 = 0, external interrupt 2 is disabled.  
EX3  
Enables or disables external interrupt 3/capture/compare interrupt 0.  
If EX3 = 0, external interrupt 3 is disabled.  
EX4  
Enables or disables external interrupt 4/capture/compare interrupt 0.  
If EX4 = 0, external interrupt 4 is disabled.  
EX5  
Enables or disables external interrupt 5/capture/compare interrupt 0.  
If EX5 = 0, external interrupt 5 is disabled.  
EX6  
Enables or disables external interrupt 6/capture/compare interrupt 0  
If EX6 = 0, external interrupt 6 is disabled.  
EXEN2  
Enables or disables the timer 2 external reload interrupt.  
EXEN2 = 0 disables the timer 2 external reload interrupt.  
The external reload function is not affected by EXEN2.  
In the following the interrupt sources are discussed individually.  
The external interrupts 0 and 1 (INT0 and INT1) can each be either level-activated or negative  
transition-activated, depending on bits IT0 and IT1 in register TCON (see figure 8-4). The flags that  
actually generate these interrupts are bits IE0 and lE1 in TCON. When an external interrupt is  
generated, the flag that generated this interrupt is cleared by the hardware when the service routine  
is vectored too, but only if the interrupt was transition-activated. lf the interrupt was level-activated,  
then the requesting external source directly controls the request flag, rather than the on-chip  
hardware.  
The timer 0 and timer 1 interrupts are generated by TF0 and TF1 in register TCON, which are set  
by a rollover in their respective timer/counter registers (exception see section 7.3.4 for timer 0 in  
mode 3). When a timer interrupt is generated, the flag that generated it is cleared by the on-chip  
hardware when the service routine is vectored too.  
Semiconductor Group  
116  
Interrupt System  
The serial port interrupt is generated by a logical OR of flag RI and Tl in SFR SCON (see  
figure 7-7). Neither of these flags is cleared by hardware when the service routine is vectored too.  
In fact, the service routine will normally have to determine whether it was the receive interrupt flag  
or the transmission interrupt flag that generated the interrupt, and the bit will have to be cleared by  
software.  
The timer 2 interrupt is generated by the logical OR of bit TF2 in register T2CON and bit EXF2 in  
register IRCON. Figures 8-5 and 8-6 show SFR’s T2CON and IRCON. Neither of these flags is  
cleared by hardware when the service routine is vectored to. In fact, the service routine may have  
to determine whether it was TF2 or EXF2 that generated the interrupt, and the bit will have to be  
cleared by software.  
Figure 8-4  
Special Function Register TCON (Address 88 )  
H
8F  
8E  
C5  
8C  
8B  
8A  
89  
88  
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
88  
TF1  
TR1  
TF0  
TR0  
IE1  
IT1  
IE0  
IT0  
TCON  
H
These bits are not used for interrupt control.  
Bit  
Function  
IT0  
Interrupt 0 type control bit. Set/cleared by software to specify falling edge/low-  
level triggered external interrupts.  
IE0  
IT1  
Interrupt 0 edge flag. Set by hardware when external interrupt edge is detected.  
Cleared when interrupt processed.  
Interrupt 1 type control bit. Set/cleared by software to specify falling edge/low-  
level triggered external interrupts.  
IE1  
TF0  
TF1  
Interrupt 1 edge flag. Set by hardware when external interrupt edge is detected.  
Cleared when interrupt processed.  
Timer 0 overflow flag. Set by hardware on timer/counter overflow. Cleared by  
hardware when processor vectors to interrupt routine.  
Timer 1 overflow flag. Set by hardware on timer/counter overflow. Cleared by  
hardware when processor vectors to interrupt routine.  
The A/D converter interrupt is generated by IADC in register IRCON (see figure 8-6). lt is set  
some cycles before the result is available. That is, if an interrupt is generated, in any case the  
converted result in ADDAT is valid on the first instruction of the interrupt service routine (with  
respect to the minimal interrupt response time). lf continuous conversions are established, IADC is  
set once during each conversion. lf an A/D converter interrupt is generated, flag IADC will have to  
be cleared by software.  
Semiconductor Group  
117  
Interrupt System  
The external interrupt 2 (INT2/) can be either positive or negative transition-activated depending  
on bit I2FR in register T2CON (see figure 8-5). The flag that actually generates this interrupt is bit  
IEX2 in register IRCON. lf an interrupt 2 is generated, flag IEX2 is cleared by hardware when the  
service routine is vectored too.  
Figure 8-5  
Special Function Register T2CON (Address 0C8 )  
H
0CF  
0CE  
0CD  
0CC  
0CB  
0CA  
0C9  
0C8  
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
0C8  
T2PS I3FR  
I2FR T2R1 T2R0 T2CM T2I1  
T2I0 T2CON  
H
These bits are not used for interrupt control.  
Bit  
Function  
I2FR  
External interrupt 2 falling/rising edge flag. When set, the interrupt 2 request flag  
IEX2 will be set on a positive transition at pin P1.4/INT2. I2FR = 0 specifies  
external interrupt 2 to be negative-transition activated.  
I3FR  
External interrupt 3 falling/rising edge flag. When set, the interrupt 3 request flag  
IEX3 will be set on a positive transition at pin P1.0/INT3. I3FR = 0 specifies  
external interrupt 3 to be negative-transition active.  
Like the external interrupt 2, the external interrupt 3 (INT3) can be either positive or negative  
transition-activated, depending on bit I3FR in register T2CON. The flag that actually generates this  
interrupt is bit IEX3 in register IRCON. In addition, this flag will be set if a compare event occurs at  
pin P1.0/INT3/CC0, regardless of the compare mode established and the transition at the  
respective pin. The flag IEX3 is cleared by hardware when the service routine is vectored too.  
The external interrupts 4 (INT4), 5 (INT5), 6 (INT6)are positive transition-activated. The flags that  
actually generate these interrupts are bits IEX4, IEX5, and IEX6 in register IRCON (see figure 8-6).  
In addition, these flags will be set if a compare event occurs at the corresponding output pin P1.1/  
INT4/CC1, P1.2/INT5/CC2, and P1.3/INT6/CC3, regardless of the compare mode established and  
the transition at the respective pin. When an interrupt is generated, the flag that generated it is  
cleared by the on-chip hardware when the service routine is vectored too.  
Semiconductor Group  
118  
Interrupt System  
Figure 8-6  
Special Function Register IRCON (Address 0C0 )  
H
0C7  
0C6  
0C5  
0C4  
0C3  
0C2  
0C1  
0C0  
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
0C0  
EXF2  
TF2  
IEX6  
IEX5  
IEX4  
IEX3  
IEX2 IADC IRCON  
H
Bit  
Function  
IADC  
A/D converter interrupt request flag. Set by hardware at the end of a conversion.  
Must be cleared by software.  
IEX2  
IEX3  
IEX4  
IEX5  
IEX6  
External interrupt 2 edge flag. Set by hardware when external interrupt edge was  
detected or when a compare event occurred at pin 1.4/INT2/CC4. Cleared when  
interrupt processed.  
External interrupt 3 edge flag. Set by hardware when external interrupt edge was  
detected or when a compare event occurred at pin 1.0/INT3/CC0. Cleared when  
interrupt processed.  
External interrupt 4 edge flag. Set by hardware when external interrupt edge was  
detected or when a compare event occurred at pin 1.1/INT4/CC1. Cleared when  
interrupt processed.  
External interrupt 5 edge flag. Set by hardware when external interrupt edge was  
detected or when a compare event occurred at pin 1.2/INT5/CC2. Cleared when  
interrupt processed.  
External interrupt 6 edge flag. Set by hardware when external interrupt edge was  
detected or when a compare event occurred at pin 1.3/INT6/CC3. Cleared when  
interrupt processed.  
TF2  
Timer 2 overflow flag. Set by timer 2 overflow. Must be cleared by software. If the  
timer 2 interrupt is enabled, TF2 = 1 will cause an interrupt.  
EXF2  
Timer 2 external reload flag. Set when a reload is caused by a negative transition  
on pin T2EX while EXEN2 = 1. When the timer 2 interrupt is enabled, EXF2 = 1  
will cause the CPU to vector the timer 2 interrupt routine. Can be used as an  
additional external interrupt when the reload function is not used. EXF2 must be  
cleared by software.  
Semiconductor Group  
119  
Interrupt System  
All of these bits that generate interrupts can be set or cleared by software, with the same result as  
if they had been set or cleared by hardware. That is, interrupts can be generated or pending  
interrupts can be cancelled by software. The only exceptions are the request flags IE0 and lE1. lf  
the external interrupts 0 and 1 are programmed to be level-activated, IE0 and lE1 are controlled by  
the external source via pin INT0 and INT1, respectively. Thus, writing a one to these bits will not set  
the request flag IE0 and/or lE1. In this mode, interrupts 0 and 1 can only be generated by software  
and by writing a 0 to the corresponding pins INT0(P3.2) and INT1(P3.3), provided that this will not  
affect any peripheral circuit connected to the pins.  
Each of these interrupt sources can be individually enabled or disabled by setting or clearing a bit  
in the special function registers IEN0 and IEN1 (figures 8-2 and 8-3). Note that IEN0 contains also  
a global disable bit, EAL, which disables all interrupts at once. Also note that in the SAB 8051 the  
interrupt priority register IP is located at address 0B8 ; in the SAB 80(C)515/80(C)535 this location  
H
is occupied by register IEN1.  
8.2  
Priority Level Structure  
As already mentioned above, all interrupt sources are combined as pairs;  
table 8-1 lists the structure of the interrupt sources.  
Table 8-1  
Pairs of Interrupt Sources  
External Interrupt 0  
Timer 0 interrupt  
A/D Converter Interrupt  
External interrupt 2  
External interrupt 3  
External interrupt 4  
External interrupt 5  
External interrupt 6  
External interrupt 1  
Timer 1 interrupt  
Serial channel 0 interrupt  
Timer 2 interrupt  
Each pair of interrupt sources can be programmed individually to one of four priority levels by setting  
or clearing one bit in the special function register IP0 and one in IP1 (figure 8-7). A low-priority  
interrupt can be interrupted by a high-priority interrupt, but not by another interrupt of the same or  
a lower priority. An interrupt of the highest priority level cannot be interrupted by another interrupt  
source.  
Semiconductor Group  
120  
Interrupt System  
lf two or more requests of different priority levels are received simultaneously, the request of the  
highest priority is serviced first. lf requests of the same priority level are received simultaneously,  
an internal polling sequence determines which request is to be serviced first. Thus, within each  
priority level there is a second priority structure determined by the polling sequence, as follows (see  
figure 8-8):  
– Within one pair the "left" interrupt is serviced first  
– The pairs are serviced from top to bottom of the table.  
Figure 8-7  
Special Function Registers IP0 and IP1 (Address 0A9 and 0B9 )  
H
H
0A9  
0B9  
IP0.5  
IP1.5  
IP0.4 IP0.3 IP0.2 IP0.1 IP0.0 IP0  
IP1  
WDTS  
H
IP1.4 IP1.3 IP1.2 IP1.1 IP1.0  
H
These bits are not used for interrupt control.  
Corresponding bit locations in both registers are used to set the interrupt priority level of an interrupt  
pair.  
Bit  
Function  
IP0.x –  
IP1.x  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Set priority level 0 (lowest)  
Set priority level 1  
Set priority level 2  
Set priority level 3 (highest)  
Bit  
Function  
IP1.0/IP0.0  
IP1.1/IP0.1  
IP1.2/IP0.2  
IP1.3/IP0.3  
IP1.4/IP0.4  
IP1.5/IP0.5  
IE0/IADC  
TF0/IEX2  
IE1/IEX3  
TF1/IEX4  
RI + TI/IEX5  
TF2 + EXF2/IEX6  
Semiconductor Group  
121  
Interrupt System  
Figure 8-8  
Priority-Within-Level Structure  
High  
Low Priority  
Interrupt source  
IE0  
TF0  
IADC High  
IEX2  
IE1  
TF1  
RI + TI  
TF2 + EXF2  
IEX3  
IEX4  
IEX5  
IEX6 Low  
Note:  
This "priority-within-level" structure is only used to resolve simultaneous requests of the same  
priority level.  
8.3  
How Interrupts are Handled  
The interrupt flags are sampled at S5P2 in each machine cycle. The sampled flags are polled during  
the following machine cycle. lf one of the flags was in a set condition at S5P2 of the preceding cycle,  
the polling cycle will find it and the interrupt system will generate a LCALL to the appropriate service  
routine, provided this hardware-generated LCALL is not blocked by any of the following conditions:  
1) An interrupt of equal or higher priority is already in progress.  
2) The current (polling) cycle is not in the final cycle of the instruction in progress.  
3) The instruction in progress is RETI or any write access to registers IEN0, IEN1, IEN2 or IP0  
and IP1.  
Any of these three conditions will block the generation of the LCALL to the interrupt service routine.  
Condition 2 ensures that the instruction in progress is completed before vectoring to any service  
routine. Condition 3 ensures that if the instruction in progress is RETI or any write access to  
registers IEN0, IEN1 or IP0 and IP1, then at least one more instruction will be executed before any  
interrupt is vectored too; this delay guarantees that changes of the interrupt status can be observed  
by the CPU.  
Semiconductor Group  
122  
Interrupt System  
The polling cycle is repeated with each machine cycle, and the values polled are the values that  
were present at S5P2 of the previous machine cycle. Note that if any interrupt flag is active but not  
being responded to for one of the conditions already mentioned, or if the flag is no longer active  
when the blocking condition is removed, the denied interrupt will not be serviced. In other words,  
the fact that the interrupt flag was once active but not serviced is not remembered. Every polling  
cycle interrogates only the pending interrupt requests.  
The polling cycle/LCALL sequence is illustrated in figure 8-9.  
Figure 8-9  
Interrupt Response Timing Diagram  
Note that if an interrupt of a higher priority level goes active prior to S5P2 in the machine cycle  
labeled C3 in figure 8-9, then, in accordance with the above rules, it will be vectored too during C5  
and C6 without any instruction for the lower priority routine to be executed.  
Thus, the processor acknowledges an interrupt request by executing a hardware-generated LCALL  
to the appropriate servicing routine. In some cases it also clears the flag that generated the  
interrupt, while in other cases it does not; then this has to be done by the user’s software. The  
hardware clears the external interrupt flags IE0 and lE1 only if they were transition-activated. The  
hardware-generated LCALL pushes the contents of the program counter onto the stack (but it does  
not save the PSW) and reloads the program counter with an address that depends on the source  
of the interrupt being vectored too, as shown in the following (table 8-2).  
Semiconductor Group  
123  
Interrupt System  
Table 8-2  
Interrupt Sources and Vectors  
Interrupt Request Flags  
Interrupt Vector Address  
Interrupt Source  
IE0  
0003  
H
External interrupt 0  
Timer overflow  
TF0  
000B  
H
IE1  
0013  
H
External interrupt 1  
Timer 1 overflow  
TF1  
001B  
H
RI/TI  
TF2/EXF2  
IADC  
IEX2  
IEX3  
IEX4  
IEX5  
IEX6  
0023  
H
Serial channel  
002B  
H
Timer 2 overflow/ext. reload  
A/D converter  
0043  
H
004B  
H
External interrupt 2  
External interrupt 3  
External interrupt 4  
External interrupt 5  
External interrupt 6  
0053  
H
005B  
H
0063  
H
006B  
H
Execution proceeds from that location until the RETI instruction is encountered. The RETI  
instruction informs the processor that the interrupt routine is no longer in progress, then pops the  
two top bytes from the stack and reloads the program counter. Execution of the interrupted program  
continues from the point where it was stopped. Note that the RETI instruction is very important  
because it informs the processor that the program left the current interrupt priority level. A simple  
RET instruction would also have returned execution to the interrupted program, but it would have  
left the interrupt control system thinking an interrupt was still in progress. In this case no interrupt of  
the same or lower priority level would be acknowledged.  
Semiconductor Group  
124  
Interrupt System  
8.4  
External Interrupts  
The external interrupts 0 and 1 can be programmed to be level-activated or negative-transition  
activated by setting or clearing bit IT0 or IT1, respectively, in register TCON (see figure 8-4).  
lf ITx = 0 (x = 0 or 1), external interrupt x is triggered by a detected low level at the INTx pin.  
lf ITx = 1, external interrupt x is negative edge-triggered. In this mode, if successive samples of the  
INTx pin show a high in one cycle and a low in the next cycle, interrupt request flag lEx in TCON is  
set. Flag bit lEx then requests the interrupt.  
lf the external interrupt 0 or 1 is level-activated, the external source has to hold the request active  
until the requested interrupt is actually generated. Then it has to deactivate the request before the  
interrupt service routine is completed, or else another interrupt will be generated.  
The external interrupts 2 and 3 can be programmed to be negative or positive transition-activated  
by setting or clearing bit I2FR or I3FR in register T2CON (see figure 8-5). lf IxFR = 0 (x = 2 or 3),  
external interrupt x is negative transition-activated. lf IxFR = 1, external interrupt is triggered by a  
positive transition.  
The external interrupts 4, 5, and 6 are activated by a positive transition. The external timer 2 reload  
trigger interrupt request flag EXF2 will be activated by a negative transition at pin P1.5/T2EX but  
only if bit EXEN2 is set.  
Since the external interrupt pins (INT2 to INT6) are sampled once in each machine cycle, an input  
high or low should be held for at least 12 oscillator periods to ensure sampling. lf the external  
interrupt is transition-activated, the external source has to hold the request pin low (high for INT2  
and INT3, if it is programmed to be negative transition-active) for at least one cycle, and then hold  
it high (low) for at least one cycle to ensure that the transition is recognized so that the  
corresponding interrupt request flag will be set (see figure 8-10). The external interrupt request  
flags will automatically be cleared by the CPU when the service routine is called.  
Semiconductor Group  
125  
Interrupt System  
Figure 8-10  
External Interrupt Detection  
8.5  
Response Time  
lf an external interrupt is recognized, its corresponding request flag is set at S5P2 in every machine  
cycle. The value is not polled by the circuitry until the next machine cycle. lf the request is active  
and conditions are right for it to be acknowledged, a hardware subroutine call to the requested  
service routine will be the next instruction to be executed. The call itself takes two cycles. Thus a  
minimum of three complete machine cycles will elapse between activation and external interrupt  
request and the beginning of execution of the first instruction of the service routine.  
A longer response time would be obtained if the request was blocked by one of the three previously  
listed conditions. lf an interrupt of equal or higher priority is already in progress, the additional wait  
time obviously depends on the nature of ’the other interrupt’s service routine. lf the instruction in  
progress is not in its final cycle, the additional wait time cannot be more than 3 cycles since the  
longest instructions (MUL and DIV) are only 4 cycles long; and, if the instruction in progress is RETI  
or a write access to registers IEN0, IEN1 or IP0, IP1, the additional wait time cannot be more than  
5 cycles (a maximum of one more cycle to complete the instruction in progress, plus 4 cycles to  
complete the next instruction, if the instruction is MUL or DIV).  
Thus, in a single interrupt system, the response time is always more than 3 cycles and less than  
9 cycles.  
Semiconductor Group  
126  
Instruction Set  
9
Instruction Set  
The SAB 80(C)515/80(C)535 instruction set includes 111 instructions, 49 of which are single-byte,  
45 two-byte and 17 three-byte instructions. The instruction opcode format consists of a function  
mnemonic followed by a ”destination, source” operand field. This field specifies the data type and  
addressing method(s) to be used.  
Like all other members of the 8051-family, the SAB 80(C)515/80(C)535 can be programmed with  
the same instruction set common to the basic member, the SAB 8051.  
Thus, the SAB 80(C)515/80(C)535 is 100% software compatible to the SAB 8051 and may be  
programmed with 8051 assembler or high-level languages.  
9.1  
Addressing Modes  
The SAB 80(C)515/80(C)535 uses five addressing modes:  
– register  
– direct  
– immediate  
– register indirect  
– base register plus index-register indirect  
Table 9-1 summarizes the memory spaces which may be accessed by each of the addressing  
modes.  
Register Addressing  
Register addressing accesses the eight working registers (R0 - R7) of the selected register bank.  
The least significant bit of the instruction opcode indicates which register is to be used. ACC, B,  
DPTR and CY, the Boolean processor accumulator, can also be addressed as registers.  
Direct Addressing  
Direct addressing is the only method of accessing the special function registers. The lower  
128 bytes of internal RAM are also directly addressable.  
Immediate Addressing  
Immediate addressing allows constants to be part of the instruction in program memory.  
Semiconductor Group  
127  
Instruction Set  
Table 9-1  
Addressing Modes and Associated Memory Spaces  
Addressing Modes  
Associated Memory Spaces  
Register addressing  
R0 through R7 of selected register bank, ACC,  
B, CY (Bit), DPTR  
Direct addressing  
Lower 128 bytes of internal RAM, special  
function registers  
Immediate addressing  
Program memory  
Register indirect addressing  
Internal RAM (@R1, @R0, SP), external data  
memory (@R1, @R0, @DPTR)  
Base register plus index register addressing  
Program memory (@DPTR + A, @PC + A)  
Register Indirect Addressing  
Register indirect addressing uses the contents of either R0 or R1 (in the selected register bank) as  
a pointer to locations in a 256-byte block: the 256 bytes of internal RAM or the lower 256 bytes of  
external data memory. Note that the special function registers are not accessible by this method.  
The upper half of the internal RAM can be accessed by indirect addressing only. Access to the full  
64 Kbytes of external data memory address space is accomplished by using the 16-bit data pointer.  
Execution of PUSH and POP instructions also uses register indirect addressing. The stack may  
reside anywhere in the internal RAM.  
Base Register plus Index Register Addressing  
Base register plus index register addressing allows a byte to be accessed from program memory  
via an indirect move from the location whose address is the sum of a base register (DPTR or PC)  
and index register, ACC. This mode facilitates look-up table accesses.  
Boolean Processor  
The Boolean processor is a bit processor integrated into the SAB 80(C)515/80(C)535. It has its own  
instruction set, accumulator (the carry flag), bit-addressable RAM and l/O.  
Semiconductor Group  
128  
Instruction Set  
The Bit Manipulation Instructions allow:  
– set bit  
– clear bit  
– complement bit  
– jump if bit is set  
– jump if bit is not set  
– jump if bit is set and clear bit  
– move bit from / to carry  
Addressable bits, or their complements, may be logically AND-ed or OR-ed with the contents of the  
carry flag. The result is returned to the carry register.  
9.2  
Introduction to the Instruction Set  
The instruction set is divided into four functional groups:  
– data transfer  
– arithmetic  
– logic  
– control transfer  
9.2.1  
Data Transfer  
Data operations are divided into three classes:  
– general-purpose  
– accumulator-specific  
– address-object  
None of these operations affects the PSW flag settings except a POP or MOV directly to the PSW.  
Semiconductor Group  
129  
Instruction Set  
General-Purpose Transfers  
– MOV performs a bit or byte transfer from the source operand to the destination operand.  
– PUSH increments the SP register and then transfers a byte from the source operand to the  
stack location currently addressed by SP.  
– POP transfers a byte operand from the stack location addressed by the SP to the destination  
operand and then decrements SP.  
Accumulator-Specific Transfers  
– XCH exchanges the byte source operand with register A (accumulator).  
– XCHD exchanges the low-order nibble of the source operand byte with the low-order nibble  
of A.  
– MOVX performs a byte move between the external data memory and the accumulator. The  
external address can be specified by the DPTR register (16 bit) or the R1 or R0 register (8 bit).  
– MOVC moves a byte from program memory to the accumulator. The operand in A is used as  
an index into a 256-byte table pointed to by the base register (DPTR or PC). The byte operand  
accessed is transferred to the accumulator.  
Address-Object Transfer  
– MOV DPTR, #data loads 16 bits of immediate data into a pair of destination registers, DPH  
and DPL.  
9.2.2  
Arithmetic  
The SAB 80(C)515/80(C)535 has four basic mathematical operations. Only 8-bit operations using  
unsigned arithmetic are supported directly. The overflow flag, however, permits the addition and  
subtraction operation to serve for both unsigned and signed binary integers. Arithmetic can also be  
performed directly on packed BCD representations.  
Addition  
– INC (increment) adds one to the source operand and puts the result in the operand.  
– ADD adds A to the source operand and returns the result to A.  
– ADDC (add with carry) adds A and the source operand, then adds one (1) if CY is set, and  
puts the result in A.  
– DA (decimal-add-adjust for BCD addition) corrects the sum which results from the binary  
addition of two-digit decimal operands. The packed decimal sum formed by DA is returned to  
A. CY is set if the BCD result is greater than 99; otherwise, it is cleared.  
Semiconductor Group  
130  
Instruction Set  
Subtraction  
– SUBB (subtract with borrow) subtracts the second source operand from the the first operand  
(the accumulator), subtracts one (1) if CY is set and returns the result to A.  
– DEC (decrement) subtracts one (1) from the source operand and returns the result to the  
operand.  
Multiplication  
– MUL performs an unsigned multiplication of the A register, returning a double byte result. A  
receives the low-order byte, B receives the high-order byte. OV is cleared if the top half of the  
result is zero and is set if it is not zero. CY is cleared. AC is unaffected.  
Division  
– DIV performs an unsigned division of the A register by the B register; it returns the integer  
quotient to the A register and returns the fractional remainder to the B register. Division by  
zero leaves indeterminate data in registers A and B and sets OV; otherwise, OV is cleared.  
CY is cleared. AC remains unaffected.  
Flags  
Unless otherwise stated in the previous descriptions, the flags of PSW are affected as follows:  
– CY is set if the operation causes a carry to or a borrow from the resulting high-order bit;  
otherwise CY is cleared.  
– AC is set if the operation results in a carry from the low-order four bits of the result (during  
addition), or a borrow from the high-order bits to the low-order bits (during subtraction);  
otherwise AC is cleared.  
– OV is set if the operation results in a carry to the high-order bit of the result but not a carry  
from the bit, or vice versa; otherwise OV is cleared. OV is used in two’s-complement  
arithmetic, because it is set when the signal result cannot be represented in 8 bits.  
– P is set if the modulo-2 sum of the eight bits in the accumulator is 1 (odd parity); otherwise P  
is cleared (even parity). When a value is written to the PSW register, the P bit remains  
unchanged, as it always reflects the parity of A.  
Semiconductor Group  
131  
Instruction Set  
9.2.3  
Logic  
The SAB 80(C)515/80(C)535 performs basic logic operations on both bit and byte operands.  
Single-Operand Operations  
– CLR sets A or any directly addressable bit to zero (0).  
– SETB sets any directly bit-addressable bit to one (1).  
– CPL is used to complement the contents of the A register without affecting any flag, or any  
directly addressable bit location.  
– RL, RLC, RR, RRC, SWAP are the five operations that can be performed on A. RL, rotate left,  
RR, rotate right, RLC, rotate left through carry, RRC, rotate right through carry, and SWAP,  
rotate left four. For RLC and RRC the CY flag becomes equal to the last bit rotated out. SWAP  
rotates A left four places to exchange bits 3 through 0 with bits 7 through 4.  
Two-Operand Operations  
– ANL performs bitwise logical AND of two operands (for both bit and byte operands) and  
returns the result to the location of the first operand.  
– ORL performs bitwise logical OR of two source operands (for both bit and byte operands) and  
returns the result to the location of the first operand.  
– XRL performs logical Exclusive OR of two source operands (byte operands) and returns the  
result to the location of the first operand.  
9.2.4  
Control Transfer  
There are three classes of control transfer operations: unconditional calls, returns, jumps,  
conditional jumps, and interrupts. All control transfer operations, some upon a specific condition,  
cause the program execution to continue a non-sequential location in program memory.  
Semiconductor Group  
132  
Instruction Set  
Unconditional Calls, Returns and Jumps  
Unconditional calls, returns and jumps transfer control from the current value of the program  
counter to the target address. Both direct and indirect transfers are supported.  
– ACALL and LCALL push the address of the next instruction onto the stack and then transfer  
control to the target address. ACALL is a 2-byte instruction used when the target address is  
in the current 2K page. LCALL is a 3-byte instruction that addresses the full 64K program  
space. In ACALL, immediate data (i.e. an 11-bit address field) is concatenated to the five most  
significant bits of the PC (which is pointing to the next instruction). If ACALL is in the last 2  
bytes of a 2K page then the call will be made to the next page since the PC will have been  
incremented to the next instruction prior to execution.  
– RET transfers control to the return address saved on the stack by a previous call operation  
and decrements the SP register by two (2) to adjust the SP for the popped address.  
– AJMP, LJMP and SJMP transfer control to the target operand. The operation of AJMP and  
LJMP are analogous to ACALL and LCALL. The SJMP (short jump) instruction provides for  
transfers within a 256-byte range centered about the starting address of the next instruction  
(– 128 to + 127).  
– JMP @A + DPTR performs a jump relative to the DPTR register. The operand in A is used as  
the offset (0 - 255) to the address in the DPTR register. Thus, the effective destination for a  
jump can be anywhere in the program memory space.  
Conditional Jumps  
Conditional jumps perform a jump contingent upon a specific condition. The destination will be  
within a 256-byte range centered about the starting address of the next instruction (– 128 to + 127).  
– JZ performs a jump if the accumulator is zero.  
– JNZ performs a jump if the accumulator is not zero.  
– JC performs a jump if the carry flag is set.  
– JNC performs a jump if the carry flag is not set.  
– JB performs a jump if the directly addressed bit is set.  
– JNB performs a jump if the directly addressed bit is not set.  
– JBC performs a jump if the directly addressed bit is set and then clears the directly addressed  
bit.  
– CJNE compares the first operand to the second operand and performs a jump if they are not  
equal. CY is set if the first operand is less than the second operand; otherwise it is cleared.  
Comparisons can be made between A and directly addressable bytes in internal data memory  
or an immediate value and either A, a register in the selected register bank, or a register  
indirectly addressable byte of the internal RAM.  
– DJNZ decrements the source operand and returns the result to the operand. A jump is  
performed if the result is not zero. The source operand of the DJNZ instruction may be any  
directly addressable byte in the internal data memory. Either direct or register addressing may  
be used to address the source operand.  
Interrupt Returns  
– RETI transfers control as RET does, but additionally enables interrupts of the current priority  
level.  
Semiconductor Group  
133  
Instruction Set  
9.3  
Instruction Definitions  
All 111 instructions of the SAB 80(C)515/80(C)535 can essentially be condensed to 54 basic  
operations, in the following alphabetically ordered according to the operation mnemonic section.  
Instruction  
Flag  
OV  
Instruction  
Flag  
OV  
CY  
X
X
X
0
AC  
X
CY  
1
AC  
ADD  
ADDC  
SUBB  
MUL  
DIV  
X
X
X
X
X
SETB C  
X
CLR C  
0
X
CPL C  
X
X
X
X
X
X
ANL C,bit  
ANL C,/bit  
ORL C,bit  
ORL C,/bit  
MOV C,bit  
0
DA  
X
X
X
X
RRC  
RLC  
CJNE  
A brief example of how the instruction might be used is given as well as its effect on the PSW flags.  
The number of bytes and machine cycles required, the binary machine language encoding, and a  
symbolic description or restatement of the function is also provided.  
Note:  
Only the carry, auxiliary carry, and overflow flags are discussed. The parity bit is computed after  
every instruction cycle that alters the accumulator.  
Similarily, instructions which alter directly addressed registers could affect the other status flags if  
the instruction is applied to the PSW. Status flags can also be modified by bit manipulation.  
Semiconductor Group  
134  
Instruction Set  
Notes on Data Addressing Modes  
Rn  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Working register R0-R7  
direct  
@Ri  
#data  
#data 16  
bit  
128 internal RAM locations, any l/O port, control or status register  
Indirect internal or external RAM location addressed by register R0 or R1  
8-bit constant included in instruction  
16-bit constant included as bytes 2 and 3 of instruction  
128 software flags, any bitaddressable l/O pin, control or status bit  
Accumulator  
A
Notes on Program Addressing Modes  
addr16  
addr11  
rel  
-
-
-
Destination address for LCALL and LJMP may be anywhere within the 64-Kbyte  
program memory address space.  
Destination address for ACALL and AJMP will be within the same 2-Kbyte page of  
program memory as the first byte of the following instruction.  
SJMP and all conditional jumps include an 8 bit offset byte. Range is + 127/– 128  
bytes relative to the first byte of the following instruction.  
All mnemonics copyrighted: Intel Corporation 1980  
Semiconductor Group  
135  
Instruction Set  
ACALL  
addr11  
Absolute call  
Function:  
Description:  
ACALL unconditionally calls a subroutine located at the indicated address. The  
instruction increments the PC twice to obtain the address of the following  
instruction, then pushes the 16-bit result onto the stack (low-order byte first) and  
increments the stack pointer twice. The destination address is obtained by  
successively concatenating the five high-order bits of the incremented PC, op code  
bits 7-5, and the second byte of the instruction. The subroutine called must  
therefore start within the same 2K block of program memory as the first byte of the  
instruction following ACALL. No flags are affected.  
Example:  
Initially SP equals 07 . The label ”SUBRTN” is at program memory location 0345 .  
After executing the instruction  
H
H
ACALL SUBRTN  
at location 0123 , SP will contain 09 , internal RAM location 08 and 09 will  
H
H
H
H
H
contain 25 and 01 , respectively, and the PC will contain 0345 .  
H
H
Operation:  
ACALL  
(PC) (PC) + 2  
(SP) (SP) + 1  
((SP)) (PC7-0)  
(SP) (SP) + 1  
((SP)) (PC15-8)  
(PC10-0) page address  
Encoding:  
a10 a9 a8 1 0 0 0 1  
a7 a6 a5 a4 a3 a2 a1 a0  
Bytes:  
2
2
Cycles:  
Semiconductor Group  
136  
Instruction Set  
ADD  
A, <src-byte>  
Function:  
Description:  
Add  
ADD adds the byte variable indicated to the accumulator, leaving the result in the  
accumulator. The carry and auxiliary carry flags are set, respectively, if there is a  
carry out of bit 7 or bit 3, and cleared otherwise. When adding unsigned integers,  
the carry flag indicates an overflow occurred.  
OV is set if there is a carry out of bit 6 but not out of bit 7, or a carry out of bit 7 but  
not out of bit 6; otherwise OV is cleared. When adding signed integers, OV indicates  
a negative number produced as the sum of two positive operands, or a positive sum  
from two negative operands.  
Four source operand addressing modes are allowed: register, direct, register-  
indirect, or immediate.  
Example:  
The accumulator holds 0C3H (11000011B) and register 0 holds 0AAH (10101010B).  
The instruction  
ADD  
A,R0  
will leave 6DH (01101101B) in the accumulator with the AC flag cleared and both  
the carry flag and OV set to 1.  
ADD  
A,Rn  
Operation:  
ADD  
(A) (A) + (Rn)  
Encoding:  
0 0 1 0 1 r r r  
Bytes:  
1
1
Cycles:  
ADD  
A,direct  
Operation:  
ADD  
(A) (A) + (direct)  
Encoding:  
0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1  
direct address  
Bytes:  
2
1
Cycles:  
Semiconductor Group  
137  
Instruction Set  
ADD  
A, @Ri  
ADD  
Operation:  
(A) (A) + ((Ri))  
Encoding:  
0 0 1 0 0 1 1 i  
Bytes:  
1
1
Cycles:  
ADD  
A, #data  
Operation:  
ADD  
(A) (A) + #data  
Encoding:  
0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0  
immediate data  
Bytes:  
2
1
Cycles:  
Semiconductor Group  
138  
Instruction Set  
ADDC  
A, < src-byte>  
Add with carry  
Function:  
Description:  
ADDC simultaneously adds the byte variable indicated, the carry flag and the  
accumulator contents, leaving the result in the accumulator. The carry and auxiliary  
carry flags are set, respectively, if there is a carry out of bit 7 or bit 3, and cleared  
otherwise. When adding unsigned integers, the carry flag indicates an overflow  
occurred.  
OV is set if there is a carry out of bit 6 but not out of bit 7, or a carry out of bit 7 but  
not out of bit 6; otherwise OV is cleared. When adding signed integers, OV indicates  
a negative number produced as the sum of two positive operands or a positive sum  
from two negative operands.  
Four source operand addressing modes are allowed: register, direct, register-  
indirect, or immediate.  
Example:  
The accumulator holds 0C3 (11000011B) and register 0 holds 0AA (10101010B)  
with the carry flag set. The instruction  
H
H
ADDC  
A,R0  
will leave 6E (01101110B) in the accumulator with AC cleared and both the carry  
H
flag and OV set to 1.  
ADDC  
A,Rn  
Operation:  
ADDC  
(A) (A) + (C) + (Rn)  
Encoding:  
0 0 1 1 1 r r r  
Bytes:  
1
1
Cycles:  
ADDC  
A,direct  
Operation:  
ADDC  
(A) (A) + (C) + (direct)  
Encoding:  
0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1  
direct address  
Bytes:  
2
1
Cycles:  
Semiconductor Group  
139  
Instruction Set  
ADDC  
A, @Ri  
ADDC  
Operation:  
(A) (A) + (C) + ((Ri))  
Encoding:  
0 0 1 1 0 1 1 i  
Bytes:  
1
1
Cycles:  
ADDC  
A, #data  
Operation:  
ADDC  
(A) (A) + (C) + #data  
Encoding:  
0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0  
immediate data  
Bytes:  
2
1
Cycles:  
Semiconductor Group  
140  
Instruction Set  
AJMP  
addr11  
Absolute jump  
Function:  
Description:  
AJMP transfers program execution to the indicated address, which is formed at run-  
time by concatenating the high-order five bits of the PC (after incrementing the PC  
twice), op code bits 7-5, and the second byte of the instruction. The destination must  
therefore be within the same 2K block of program memory as the first byte of the  
instruction following AJMP.  
Example:  
The label ”JMPADR” is at program memory location 0123 . The instruction  
H
AJMP  
JMPADR  
is at location 0345 and will load the PC with 0123 .  
H
H
Operation:  
AJM P  
(PC) (PC) + 2  
(PC10-0) page address  
Encoding:  
a10 a9 a8 0 0 0 0 1  
a7 a6 a5 a4 a3 a2 a1 a0  
Bytes:  
2
2
Cycles:  
Semiconductor Group  
141  
Instruction Set  
ANL  
<dest-byte>, <src-byte>  
Function:  
Description:  
Logical AND for byte variables  
ANL performs the bitwise logical AND operation between the variables indicated  
and stores the results in the destination variable. No flags are affected.  
The two operands allow six addressing mode combinations. When the destination  
is a accumulator, the source can use register, direct, register-indirect, or immediate  
addressing; when the destination is a direct address, the source can be the  
accumulator or immediate data.  
Note:  
When this instruction is used to modify an output port, the value used as the original  
port data will be read from the output data latch, not the input pins.  
Example:  
If the accumulator holds 0C3 (11000011B) and register 0 holds 0AA  
(10101010B) then the instruction  
H
H
ANL  
A,R0  
will leave 81 (10000001B) in the accumulator.  
H
When the destination is a directly addressed byte, this instruction will clear  
combinations of bits in any RAM location or hardware register. The mask byte  
determining the pattern of bits to be cleared would either be a constant contained  
in the instruction or a value computed in the accumulator at run-time.  
The instruction  
ANL P1, #01110011B  
will clear bits 7, 3, and 2 of output port 1.  
ANL  
A,Rn  
Operation:  
ANL  
(A) (A) (Rn)  
Encoding:  
0 1 0 1 1 r r r  
Bytes:  
1
1
Cycles:  
Semiconductor Group  
142  
Instruction Set  
ANL  
A,direct  
Operation:  
ANL  
(A) (A) (direct)  
Encoding:  
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1  
direct address  
Bytes:  
2
1
Cycles:  
ANL  
A, @Ri  
ANL  
Operation:  
(A) (A) ((Ri))  
Encoding:  
0 1 0 1 0 1 1 i  
Bytes:  
1
1
Cycles:  
ANL  
A, #data  
Operation:  
ANL  
(A) (A) #data  
Encoding:  
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0  
immediate data  
Bytes:  
2
1
Cycles:  
ANL  
direct,A  
Operation:  
ANL  
(direct) (direct) (A)  
Encoding:  
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1  
direct address  
Bytes:  
2
1
Cycles:  
Semiconductor Group  
143  
Instruction Set  
ANL  
direct, #data  
Operation:  
ANL  
(direct) (direct) #data  
0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1  
Encoding:  
direct address  
immediate data  
Bytes:  
3
2
Cycles:  
Semiconductor Group  
144  
Instruction Set  
ANL  
C, <src-bit>  
Logical AND for bit variables  
Function:  
Description:  
If the Boolean value of the source bit is a logic 0 then clear the carry flag; otherwise  
leave the carry flag in its current state. A slash (”/” preceding the operand in the  
assembly language indicates that the logical complement of the addressed bit is  
used as the source value, but the source bit itself is not affected. No other flags are  
affected.  
Only direct bit addressing is allowed for the source operand.  
Set the carry flag if, and only if, P1.0 = 1, ACC.7 = 1, and OV = 0:  
Example:  
MOV  
ANL  
ANL  
C,P1.0  
C,ACC.7  
C,/OV  
; Load carry with input pin state  
; AND carry with accumulator bit 7  
; AND with inverse of overflow flag  
ANL  
C,bit  
Operation:  
ANL  
(C) (C) (bit)  
Encoding:  
1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0  
bit address  
Bytes:  
2
2
Cycles:  
ANL  
C,/bit  
Operation:  
ANL  
(C) (C) ¬ (bit)  
Encoding:  
1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0  
bit address  
Bytes:  
2
2
Cycles:  
Semiconductor Group  
145  
Instruction Set  
CJNE  
<dest-byte >, < src-byte >, rel  
Function:  
Description:  
Compare and jump if not equal  
CJNE compares the magnitudes of the tirst two operands, and branches if their  
values are not equal. The branch destination is computed by adding the signed  
relative displacement in the last instruction byte to the PC, after incrementing the  
PC to the start of the next instruction. The carry flag is set if the unsigned integer  
value of <dest-byte> is less than the unsigned integer value of <src-byte>;  
otherwise, the carry is cleared. Neither operand is affected.  
The first two operands allow four addressing mode combinations: the accumulator  
may be compared with any directly addressed byte or immediate data, and any  
indirect RAM location or working register can be compared with an immediate  
constant.  
Example:  
The accumulator contains 34 . Register 7 contains 56 . The first instruction in the  
sequence  
H
H
CJNE  
. . .  
JC  
R7, # 60 , NOT_EQ  
. . . . .  
REQ_LOW  
. . . . .  
H
;
; R7 = 60  
; If R7 < 60  
; R7 > 60  
H
NOT_EQ  
;
H
. . .  
H
sets the carry flag and branches to the instruction at label NOT_EQ. By testing the  
carry flag, this instruction determines whether R7 is greater or less than 60 .  
H
If the data being presented to port 1 is also 34 , then the instruction  
H
WAIT:  
CJNE  
A,P1,WAIT  
clears the carry flag and continues with the next instruction in sequence, since the  
accumulator does equal the data read from P1. (If some other value was input on  
P1, the program will loop at this point until the P1 data changes to 34 ).  
H
Semiconductor Group  
146  
Instruction Set  
CJNE  
A,direct,rel  
(PC) (PC) + 3  
Operation:  
if (A) < > (direct)  
then (PC) (PC) + relative offset  
if (A) < (direct)  
then (C) 1  
else (C) 0  
Encoding:  
1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1  
direct address  
rel. address  
Bytes:  
3
2
Cycles:  
CJNE  
A, #data,rel  
(PC) (PC) + 3  
Operation:  
if (A) < > data  
then (PC) (PC) + relative offset  
if (A) data  
then (C) 1  
else (C) 0  
Encoding:  
1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0  
immediate data  
rel. address  
Bytes:  
3
2
Cycles:  
CJNE  
RN, #data, rel  
(PC) (PC) + 3  
Operation:  
if (Rn) < > data  
then (PC) (PC) + relative offset  
if (Rn) < data  
then (C) 1  
else (C) 0  
Encoding:  
1 0 1 1 1 r r r  
immediate data  
rel. address  
Bytes:  
3
2
Cycles:  
Semiconductor Group  
147  
Instruction Set  
CJNE  
@Ri, #data,rel  
(PC) (PC) + 3  
Operation:  
if ((Ri)) < > data  
then (PC) (PC) + relative offset  
if ((Ri)) < data  
then (C) 1  
else (C) 0  
Encoding:  
1 0 1 1 0 1 1 i  
immediate data  
rel. address  
Bytes:  
3
2
Cycles:  
Semiconductor Group  
148  
Instruction Set  
CLR  
A
Function:  
Clear accumulator  
Description:  
Example:  
The accumulator is cleared (all bits set to zero). No flags are affected.  
The accumulator contains 5C (01011100B). The instruction  
H
CLR  
A
will leave the accumulator set to 00 (00000000B).  
H
Operation:  
Encoding:  
CLR  
(A) 0  
1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0  
Bytes:  
1
1
Cycles:  
Semiconductor Group  
149  
Instruction Set  
CLR  
bit  
Function:  
Clear bit  
Description:  
The indicated bit is cleared (reset to zero). No other flags are affected. CLR can  
operate on the carry flag or any directly addressable bit.  
Example:  
Port 1 has previously been written with 5D (01011101B). The instruction  
H
CLR  
P1.2  
will leave the port set to 59 (01011001B).  
H
CLR  
C
Operation:  
CLR  
(C) 0  
Encoding:  
1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1  
Bytes:  
1
1
Cycles:  
CLR  
bit  
Operation:  
CLR  
(bit) 0  
Encoding:  
1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0  
bit address  
Bytes:  
2
1
Cycles:  
Semiconductor Group  
150  
Instruction Set  
CPL  
A
Function:  
Complement accumulator  
Description:  
Each bit of the accumulator is logically complemented (one’s complement). Bits  
which previously contained a one are changed to zero and vice versa. No flags are  
affected.  
Example:  
The accumulator contains 5C (01011100B). The instruction  
H
CPL  
A
will leave the accumulator set to 0A3 (10100011 B).  
H
Operation:  
Encoding:  
CPL  
(A) ← ¬ (A)  
1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0  
Bytes:  
1
1
Cycles:  
Semiconductor Group  
151  
Instruction Set  
CPL  
bit  
Function:  
Complement bit  
Description:  
The bit variable specified is complemented. A bit which had been a one is changed  
to zero and vice versa. No other flags are affected. CPL can operate on the carry or  
any directly addressable bit.  
Note:  
When this instruction is used to modify an output pin, the value used as the original  
data will be read from the output data latch, not the input pin.  
Example:  
Port 1 has previously been written with 5DH (01011101B). The instruction sequence  
CPL  
CPL  
P1.1  
P1.2  
will leave the port set to 5BH (01011011B).  
CPL  
C
Operation:  
CPL  
(C) ← ¬ (C)  
Encoding:  
1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1  
Bytes:  
1
1
Cycles:  
CPL  
bit  
Operation:  
CPL  
(bit) ← ¬ (bit)  
Encoding:  
1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0  
bit address  
Bytes:  
2
1
Cycles:  
Semiconductor Group  
152  
Instruction Set  
DA  
A
Function:  
Decimal adjust accumulator for addition  
Description:  
DA A adjusts the eight-bit value in the accumulator resulting from the earlier  
addition of two variables (each in packed BCD format), producing two four-bit digits.  
Any ADD or ADDC instruction may have been used to perform the addition.  
If accumulator bits 3-0 are greater than nine (xxxx1010-xxxx1111), or if the AC flag  
is one, six is added to the accumulator producing the proper BCD digit in the low-  
order nibble. This internal addition would set the carry flag if a carry-out of the low-  
order four-bit field propagated through all high-order bits, but it would not clear the  
carry flag otherwise.  
If the carry flag is now set, or if the four high-order bits now exceed nine (1010xxxx-  
1111xxxx), these high-order bits are incremented by six, producing the proper BCD  
digit in the high-order nibble. Again, this would set the carry flag if there was a carry-  
out of the high-order bits, but wouldn’t clear the carry. The carry flag thus indicates  
if the sum of the original two BCD variables is greater than 100, allowing multiple  
precision decimal addition. OV is not affected.  
All of this occurs during the one instruction cycle. Essentially; this instruction  
performs the decimal conversion by adding 00 , 06 , 60 , or 66 to the  
H
H
H
H
accumulator, depending on initial accumulator and PSW conditions.  
Note:  
DA A cannot simply convert a hexadecimal number in the accumulator to BCD  
notation, nor does DA A apply to decimal subtraction.  
Example:  
The accumulator holds the value 56 (01010110B) representing the packed BCD  
H
digits of the decimal number 56. Register 3 contains the value 67 (01100111B)  
H
representing the packed BCD digits of the decimal number 67. The carry flag is set.  
The instruction sequence  
ADDC  
DA  
A,R3  
A
will first perform a standard two’s-complement binary addition, resulting in the value  
0BE (10111110B) in the accumulator. The carry and auxiliary carry flags will be  
H
cleared.  
The decimal adjust instruction will then alter the accumulator to the value 24  
H
(00100100B), indicating the packed BCD digits of the decimal number 24, the low-  
order two digits of the decimal sum of 56, 67, and the carry-in. The carry flag will be  
set by the decimal adjust instruction, indicating that a decimal overflow occurred.  
The true sum 56, 67, and 1 is 124.  
Semiconductor Group  
153  
Instruction Set  
BCD variables can be incremented or decremented by adding 01 or 99 . If the  
H
H
accumulator initially holds 30 (representing the digits of 30 decimal), then the  
H
instruction sequence  
ADD  
DA  
A, #99  
A
H
will leave the carry set and 29 in the accumulator, since 30 + 99 = 129. The low-  
H
order byte of the sum can be interpreted to mean 30 – 1 = 29.  
Operation:  
DA  
contents of accumulator are BCD  
if [[(A3-0) > 9] [(AC) = 1]]  
then (A3-0) (A3-0) + 6  
and  
if [[(A7-4) > 9] [(C) = 1]]  
then (A7-4) (A7-4) + 6  
Encoding:  
1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0  
Bytes:  
1
1
Cycles:  
Semiconductor Group  
154  
Instruction Set  
DEC  
byte  
Decrement  
Function:  
Description:  
The variable indicated is decremented by 1. An original value of 00 will underflow  
H
to 0FF . No flags are affected. Four operand addressing modes are allowed:  
H
accumulator, register, direct, or register-indirect.  
Note:  
When this instruction is used to modify an output port, the value used as the original  
port data will be read from the output data latch, not the input pins.  
Example:  
Register 0 contains 7F (01111111B). Internal RAM locations 7E and 7F  
H
H
H
contain 00 and 40 , respectively. The instruction sequence  
H
H
DEC  
DEC  
DEC  
@R0  
R0  
@R0  
will leave register 0 set to 7E and internal RAM locations 7E and 7F set to  
H
H
H
0FF and 3F .  
H
H
DEC  
A
Operation:  
DEC  
(A) (A) – 1  
Encoding:  
0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0  
Bytes:  
1
1
Cycles:  
DEC  
Rn  
Operation:  
DEC  
(Rn) (Rn) – 1  
Encoding:  
0 0 0 1 1 r r r  
Bytes:  
1
1
Cycles:  
Semiconductor Group  
155  
Instruction Set  
DEC  
direct  
DEC  
Operation:  
(direct) (direct) – 1  
Encoding:  
0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1  
direct address  
Bytes:  
2
1
Cycles:  
DEC  
@Ri  
Operation:  
DEC  
((Ri)) ((Ri)) – 1  
Encoding:  
0 0 0 1 0 1 1 i  
Bytes:  
1
1
Cycles:  
Semiconductor Group  
156  
Instruction Set  
DIV  
AB  
Function:  
Divide  
Description:  
DIV AB divides the unsigned eight-bit integer in the accumulator by the unsigned  
eight-bit integer in register B. The accumulator receives the integer part of the  
quotient; register B receives the integer remainder. The carry and OV flags will be  
cleared.  
Exception: If B had originally contained 00 , the values returned in the accumulator  
H
and B register will be undefined and the overflow flag will be set. The carry flag is  
cleared in any case.  
Example:  
The accumulator contains 251 (0FB or 11111011B) and B contains 18 (12 or  
H
H
00010010B). The instruction  
DIV AB  
will leave 13 in the accumulator (0D or 00001101 B) and the value 17 (11 or  
H
H
00010001B) in B, since 251 = (13x18) + 17. Carry and OV will both be cleared.  
Operation:  
DIV  
(A15-8)  
(B7-0)  
(A) / (B)  
Encoding:  
1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0  
Bytes:  
1
4
Cycles:  
Semiconductor Group  
157  
Instruction Set  
DJNZ  
<byte>, < rel-addr>  
Function:  
Decrement and jump if not zero  
Description:  
DJNZ decrements the location indicated by 1, and branches to the address  
indicated by the second operand if the resulting value is not zero. An original value  
of 00 will underflow to 0FF . No flags are affected. The branch destination would  
H
H
be computed by adding the signed relative-displacement value in the last instruction  
byte to the PC, after incrementing the PC to the first byte of the following instruction.  
The location decremented may be a register or directly addressed byte.  
Note:  
When this instruction is used to modify an output port, the value used as the original  
port data will be read from the output data latch, not the input pins.  
Example:  
Internal RAM locations 40 , 50 , and 60 contain the values, 01 , 70 , and 15 ,  
respectively. The instruction sequence  
H
H
H
H
H
H
DJNZ 40 ,LABEL_1  
H
DJNZ 50 ,LABEL_2  
H
DJNZ 60 ,LABEL_3  
H
will cause a jump to the instruction at label LABEL_2 with the values 00 , 6F , and  
H
H
15 in the three RAM locations. The first jump was not taken because the result was  
H
zero.  
This instruction provides a simple way of executing a program loop a given number  
of times, or for adding a moderate time delay (from 2 to 512 machine cycles) with a  
single instruction. The instruction sequence  
MOV  
TOGGLE: CPL  
DJNZ  
R2, #8  
P1.7  
R2,TOGGLE  
will toggle P1.7 eight times, causing four output pulses to appear at bit 7 of output  
port 1. Each pulse will last three machine cycles; two for DJNZ and one to alter the  
pin.  
Semiconductor Group  
158  
Instruction Set  
DJNZ  
Rn,rel  
DJNZ  
Operation:  
(PC) (PC) + 2  
(Rn) (Rn) – 1  
if (Rn) > 0 or (Rn) < 0  
then (PC) (PC) + rel  
Encoding:  
1 1 0 1 1 r r r  
rel. address  
Bytes:  
2
2
Cycles:  
DJNZ  
direct,rel  
Operation:  
DJNZ  
(PC) (PC) + 2  
(direct) (direct) – 1  
if (direct) > 0 or (direct) < 0  
then (PC) (PC) + rel  
Encoding:  
1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1  
direct address  
rel. address  
Bytes:  
3
2
Cycles:  
Semiconductor Group  
159  
Instruction Set  
INC  
<byte>  
Increment  
Function:  
Description:  
INC increments the indicated variable by 1. An original value of 0FF will overflow  
H
to 00 . No flags are affected. Three addressing modes are allowed: register, direct,  
H
or register-indirect.  
Note:  
When this instruction is used to modify an output port, the value used as the original  
port data will be read from the output data latch, not the input pins.  
Example:  
Register 0 contains 7E (01111110B). Internal RAM locations 7E and 7F  
H
H
H
contain 0FF and 40 , respectively. The instruction sequence  
H
H
INC  
INC  
INC  
@R0  
R0  
@R0  
will leave register 0 set to 7F and internal RAM locations 7E and 7F holding  
H
H
H
(respectively) 00 and 41 .  
H
H
INC  
A
Operation:  
INC  
(A) (A) + 1  
Encoding:  
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0  
Bytes:  
1
1
Cycles:  
INC  
Rn  
Operation:  
INC  
(Rn) (Rn) + 1  
Encoding:  
0 0 0 0 1 r r r  
Bytes:  
1
1
Cycles:  
Semiconductor Group  
160  
Instruction Set  
INC  
direct  
INC  
Operation:  
(direct) (direct) + 1  
Encoding:  
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1  
direct address  
Bytes:  
2
1
Cycles:  
INC  
@Ri  
Operation:  
INC  
((Ri)) ((Ri)) + 1  
Encoding:  
0 0 0 0 0 1 1 i  
Bytes:  
1
1
Cycles:  
Semiconductor Group  
161  
Instruction Set  
INC  
DPTR  
Increment data pointer  
Function:  
Description:  
Increment the 16-bit data pointer by 1. A 16-bit increment (modulo 216) is performed;  
an overflow of the low-order byte of the data pointer (DPL) from 0FF to 00 will  
increment the high-order byte (DPH). No flags are affected.  
H
H
This is the only 16-bit register which can be incremented.  
Example:  
Registers DPH and DPL contain 12 and 0FE , respectively. The instruction  
sequence  
H
H
INC  
INC  
INC  
DPTR  
DPTR  
DPTR  
will change DPH and DPL to 13 and 01 .  
H
H
Operation:  
Encoding:  
INC  
(DPTR) (DPTR) + 1  
1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1  
Bytes:  
1
2
Cycles:  
Semiconductor Group  
162  
Instruction Set  
JB  
bit,rel  
Jump if bit is set  
Function:  
Description:  
If the indicated bit is a one, jump to the address indicated; otherwise proceed with  
the next instruction. The branch destination is computed by adding the signed  
relative-displacement in the third instruction byte to the PC, after incrementing the  
PC to the first byte of the next instruction. The bit tested is not modified. No flags  
are affected.  
Example:  
The data present at input port 1 is 11001010B. The accumulator holds 56  
(01010110B). The instruction sequence  
JB  
JB  
P1.2,LABEL1  
ACC.2,LABEL2  
will cause program execution to branch to the instruction at label LABEL2.  
Operation:  
Encoding:  
JB  
(PC) (PC) + 3  
if (bit) = 1  
then (PC) (PC) + rel  
0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0  
bit address  
rel. address  
Bytes:  
3
2
Cycles:  
Semiconductor Group  
163  
Instruction Set  
JBC  
bit,rel  
Jump if bit is set and clear bit  
Function:  
Description:  
If the indicated bit is one, branch to the address indicated; otherwise proceed with  
the next instruction. In either case, clear the designated bit. The branch destination  
is computed by adding the signed relative displacement in the third instruction byte  
to the PC, after incrementing the PC to the first byte of the next instruction. No flags  
are affected.  
Note:  
When this instruction is used to test an output pin, the value used as the original  
data will be read from the output data latch, not the input pin.  
Example:  
The accumulator holds 56 (01010110B). The instruction sequence  
H
JBC  
JBC  
ACC.3,LABEL1  
ACC.2,LABEL2  
will cause program execution to continue at the instruction identified by the label  
LABEL2, with the accumulator modified to 52 (01010010B).  
H
Operation:  
JBC  
(PC) (PC) + 3  
if (bit) = 1  
then (bit) 0  
(PC) (PC) + rel  
Encoding:  
0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0  
bit address  
rel. address  
Bytes:  
3
2
Cycles:  
Semiconductor Group  
164  
Instruction Set  
JC  
rel  
Function:  
Jump if carry is set  
Description:  
If the carry flag is set, branch to the address indicated; otherwise proceed with the  
next instruction. The branch destination is computed by adding the signed relative-  
displacement in the second instruction byte to the PC, after incrementing the PC  
twice. No flags are affected.  
Example:  
The carry flag is cleared. The instruction sequence  
JC  
CPL  
JC  
LABEL1  
C
LABEL2  
will set the carry and cause program execution to continue at the instruction  
identified by the label LABEL2.  
Operation:  
Encoding:  
JC  
(PC) (PC) + 2  
if (C) = 1  
then (PC) (PC) + rel  
0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0  
rel. address  
Bytes:  
2
2
Cycles:  
Semiconductor Group  
165  
Instruction Set  
JMP  
@A + DPTR  
Jump indirect  
Function:  
Description:  
Add the eight-bit unsigned contents of the accumulator with the sixteen-bit data  
pointer, and load the resulting sum to the program counter. This will be the address  
for subsequent instruction fetches. Sixteen-bit addition is performed (modulo 216): a  
carry-out from the low-order eight bits propagates through the higher-order bits.  
Neither the accumulator nor the data pointer is altered. No flags are affected.  
Example:  
An even number from 0 to 6 is in the accumulator. The following sequence of  
instructions will branch to one of four AJMP instructions in a jump table starting at  
JMP_TBL:  
MOV  
JMP  
JMP_TBL: AJMP  
AJMP  
DPTR, #JMP_TBL  
@A + DPTR  
LABEL0  
LABEL1  
AJMP  
LABEL2  
AJMP  
LABEL3  
If the accumulator equals 04 when starting this sequence, execution will jump to  
H
label LABEL2. Remember that AJMP is a two-byte instruction, so the jump  
instructions start at every other address.  
Operation:  
Encoding:  
JMP  
(PC) (A) + (DPTR)  
0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1  
Bytes:  
1
2
Cycles:  
Semiconductor Group  
166  
Instruction Set  
JNB  
bit,rel  
Jump if bit is not set  
Function:  
Description:  
If the indicated bit is a zero, branch to the indicated address; otherwise proceed with  
the next instruction. The branch destination is computed by adding the signed  
relative-displacement in the third instruction byte to the PC, after incrementing the  
PC to the first byte of the next instruction. The bit tested is not modified. No flags  
are affected.  
Example:  
The data present at input port 1 is 11001010B. The accumulator holds 56  
H
(01010110B). The instruction sequence  
JNB  
JNB  
P1.3,LABEL1  
ACC.3,LABEL2  
will cause program execution to continue at the instruction at label LABEL2.  
Operation:  
Encoding:  
JNB  
(PC) (PC) + 3  
if (bit) = 0  
then (PC) (PC) + rel.  
0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0  
bit address  
rel. address  
Bytes:  
3
2
Cycles:  
Semiconductor Group  
167  
Instruction Set  
JNC  
rel  
Function:  
Jump if carry is not set  
Description:  
If the carry flag is a zero, branch to the address indicated; otherwise proceed with  
the next instruction. The branch destination is computed by adding the signed  
relative-displacement in the second instruction byte to the PC, after incrementing  
the PC twice to point to the next instruction. The carry flag is not modified.  
Example:  
The carry flag is set. The instruction sequence  
JNC  
CPL  
JNC  
LABEL1  
C
LABEL2  
will clear the carry and cause program execution to continue at the instruction  
identified by the label LABEL2.  
Operation:  
Encoding:  
JNC  
(PC) (PC) + 2  
if (C) = 0  
then (PC) (PC) + rel  
0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0  
rel. address  
Bytes:  
2
2
Cycles:  
Semiconductor Group  
168  
Instruction Set  
JNZ  
rel  
Function:  
Jump if accumulator is not zero  
Description:  
If any bit of the accumulator is a one, branch to the indicated address; otherwise  
proceed with the next instruction. The branch destination is computed by adding the  
signed relative-displacement in the second instruction byte to the PC, after  
incrementing the PC twice. The accumulator is not modified. No flags are affected.  
Example:  
The accumulator originally holds 00 . The instruction sequence  
H
JNZ  
INC  
JNZ  
LABEL1  
A
LABEL2  
will set the accumulator to 01 and continue at label LABEL2.  
H
Operation:  
Encoding:  
JNZ  
(PC) (PC) + 2  
if (A) 0  
then (PC) (PC) + rel.  
0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0  
rel. address  
Bytes:  
2
2
Cycles:  
Semiconductor Group  
169  
Instruction Set  
JZ  
rel  
Function:  
Jump if accumulator is zero  
Description:  
If all bits of the accumulator are zero, branch to the address indicated; otherwise  
proceed with the next instruction. The branch destination is computed by adding the  
signed relative-displacement in the second instruction byte to the PC, after  
incrementing the PC twice. The accumulator is not modified. No flags are affected.  
Example:  
The accumulator originally contains 01 . The instruction sequence  
H
JZ  
DEC  
JZ  
LABEL1  
A
LABEL2  
will change the accumulator to 00 and cause program execution to continue at the  
H
instruction identified by the label LABEL2.  
Operation:  
Encoding:  
JZ  
(PC) (PC) + 2  
if (A) = 0  
then (PC) (PC) + rel  
0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0  
rel. address  
Bytes:  
2
2
Cycles:  
Semiconductor Group  
170  
Instruction Set  
LCALL  
addr16  
Long call  
Function:  
Description:  
LCALL calls a subroutine located at the indicated address. The instruction adds  
three to the program counter to generate the address of the next instruction and  
then pushes the 16-bit result onto the stack (low byte first), incrementing the stack  
pointer by two. The high-order and low-order bytes of the PC are then loaded,  
respectively, with the second and third bytes of the LCALL instruction. Program  
execution continues with the instruction at this address. The subroutine may  
therefore begin anywhere in the full 64 Kbyte program memory address space. No  
flags are affected.  
Example:  
Initially the stack pointer equals 07 . The label ”SUBRTN” is assigned to program  
memory location 1234 . After executing the instruction  
H
H
LCALL SUBRTN  
at location 0123 , the stack pointer will contain 09 , internal RAM locations 08  
H
H
H
and 09 will contain 26 and 01 , and the PC will contain 1234 .  
H
H
H
H
Operation:  
LCALL  
(PC) (PC) + 3  
(SP) (SP) + 1  
((SP)) (PC7-0)  
(SP) (SP) + 1  
((SP)) (PC15-8)  
(PC) addr15-0  
Encoding:  
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0  
addr15 . . addr8  
addr7 . . addr0  
Bytes:  
3
2
Cycles:  
Semiconductor Group  
171  
Instruction Set  
LJMP  
addr16  
Long jump  
Function:  
Description:  
LJMP causes an unconditional branch to the indicated address, by loading the high-  
order and low-order bytes of the PC (respectively) with the second and third  
instruction bytes. The destination may therefore be anywhere in the full 64K  
program memory address space. No flags are affected.  
Example:  
The label ”JMPADR” is assigned to the instruction at program memory location  
1234 . The instruction  
H
LJMP  
JMPADR  
at location 0123 will load the program counter with 1234 .  
H
H
Operation:  
Encoding:  
LJMP  
(PC) addr15-0  
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0  
addr15 . . . addr8  
addr7 . . . addr0  
Bytes:  
3
2
Cycles:  
Semiconductor Group  
172  
Instruction Set  
MOV  
<dest-byte>, <src-byte>  
Function:  
Move byte variable  
Description:  
The byte variable indicated by the second operand is copied into the location  
specified by the first operand. The source byte is not affected. No other register or  
flag is affected.  
This is by far the most flexible operation. Fifteen combinations of source and  
destination addressing modes are allowed.  
Example:  
Internal RAM location 30 holds 40 . The value of RAM location 40 is 10 . The  
H
H
H
H
data present at input port 1 is 11001010B (0CA ).  
H
MOV  
MOV  
MOV  
MOV  
MOV  
MOV  
R0, #30  
A, @R0  
R1,A  
B, @R1  
@R1,P1  
P2,P1  
; R0 < = 30  
; A < = 40  
H
H
H
; R1 < = 40  
H
; B < = 10  
H
; RAM (40 ) < = 0CA  
H
H
; P2 < = 0CA  
H
leaves the value 30 in register 0, 40 in both the accumulator and register 1, 10  
H
H
H
in register B, and 0CA (11001010B) both in RAM location 40 and output on  
H
H
port 2.  
MOV  
A,Rn  
Operation:  
MOV  
(A) (Rn)  
Encoding:  
1 1 1 0 1 r r r  
Bytes:  
1
1
Cycles:  
MOV  
A,direct *)  
Operation:  
MOV  
(A) (direct)  
Encoding:  
1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1  
direct address  
Bytes:  
2
1
Cycles:  
*) MOV A,ACC is not a valid instruction.  
Semiconductor Group  
173  
Instruction Set  
MOV  
A,@Ri  
MOV  
Operation:  
(A) ((Ri))  
Encoding:  
1 1 1 0 0 1 1 i  
Bytes:  
1
1
Cycles:  
MOV  
A, #data  
Operation:  
MOV  
(A) #data  
Encoding:  
0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0  
immediate data  
Bytes:  
2
1
Cycles:  
MOV  
Rn,A  
Operation:  
MOV  
(Rn) (A)  
Encoding:  
1 1 1 1 1 r r r  
Bytes:  
1
1
Cycles:  
MOV  
Rn,direct  
Operation:  
MOV  
(Rn) (direct)  
Encoding:  
1 0 1 0 1 r r r  
direct address  
Bytes:  
2
2
Cycles:  
Semiconductor Group  
174  
Instruction Set  
MOV  
Rn, #data  
Operation:  
MOV  
(Rn) #data  
Encoding:  
0 1 1 1 1 r r r  
immediate data  
direct address  
direct address  
dir.addr. (src)  
Bytes:  
2
1
Cycles:  
MOV  
direct,A  
Operation:  
MOV  
(direct) (A)  
Encoding:  
1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1  
Bytes:  
2
1
Cycles:  
MOV  
direct,Rn  
Operation:  
MOV  
(direct) (Rn)  
Encoding:  
1 0 0 0 1 r r r  
Bytes:  
2
2
Cycles:  
MOV  
direct,direct  
Operation:  
MOV  
(direct) (direct)  
Encoding:  
1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1  
dir.addr. (dest)  
Bytes:  
3
2
Cycles:  
Semiconductor Group  
175  
Instruction Set  
MOV  
direct, @ Ri  
Operation:  
MOV  
(direct) ((Ri))  
Encoding:  
1 0 0 0 0 1 1 i  
direct address  
Bytes:  
2
2
Cycles:  
MOV  
direct, #data  
Operation:  
MOV  
(direct) #data  
Encoding:  
0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1  
direct address  
immediate data  
Bytes:  
3
2
Cycles:  
MOV  
@ Ri,A  
MOV  
Operation:  
((Ri)) (A)  
Encoding:  
1 1 1 1 0 1 1 i  
Bytes:  
1
1
Cycles:  
MOV  
@ Ri,direct  
Ooeration:  
MOV  
((Ri)) (direct)  
Encoding:  
1 0 1 0 0 1 1 i  
direct address  
Bytes:  
2
2
Cycles:  
Semiconductor Group  
176  
Instruction Set  
MOV  
@ Ri,#data  
Operation:  
MOV  
((Ri)) #data  
0 1 1 1 0 1 1 i  
Encoding:  
immediate data  
Bytes:  
2
1
Cycles:  
Semiconductor Group  
177  
Instruction Set  
MOV  
<dest-bit>, <src-bit>  
Function:  
Description:  
Move bit data  
The Boolean variable indicated by the second operand is copied into the location  
specified by the first operand. One of the operands must be the carry flag; the other  
may be any directly addressable bit. No other register or flag is affected.  
Example:  
The carry flag is originally set. The data present at input port 3 is 11000101B. The  
data previously written to output port 1 is 35 (00110101B).  
H
MOV  
MOV  
MOV  
P1.3,C  
C,P3.3  
P1.2,C  
will leave the carry cleared and change port 1 to 39 (00111001 B).  
H
MOV  
C,bit  
Operation:  
MOV  
(C) (bit)  
Encoding:  
1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0  
bit address  
Bytes:  
2
1
Cycles:  
MOV  
bit,C  
Operation:  
MOV  
(bit) (C)  
Encoding:  
1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0  
bit address  
Bytes:  
2
2
Cycles:  
Semiconductor Group  
178  
Instruction Set  
MOV  
DPTR, #data16  
Load data pointer with a 16-bit constant  
Function:  
Description:  
The data pointer is loaded with the 16-bit constant indicated. The 16 bit constant is  
loaded into the second and third bytes of the instruction. The second byte (DPH) is  
the high-order byte, while the third byte (DPL) holds the low-order byte. No flags are  
affected.  
This is the only instruction which moves 16 bits of data at once.  
The instruction  
Example:  
MOV  
DPTR, #1234  
H
will load the value 1234 into the data pointer: DPH will hold 12 and DPL will hold  
H
H
34 .  
H
Operation:  
Encoding:  
MOV  
(DPTR) #data15-0  
DPH DPL #data15-8 #data7-0  
1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 immed. data 15 . . . 8  
immed. data 7 . . . 0  
Bytes:  
3
2
Cycles:  
Semiconductor Group  
179  
Instruction Set  
MOVC  
A, @A + <base-reg>  
Function:  
Description:  
Move code byte  
The MOVC instructions load the accumulator with a code byte, or constant from  
program memory. The address of the byte fetched is the sum of the original  
unsigned eight-bit accumulator contents and the contents of a sixteen-bit base  
register, which may be either the data pointer or the PC. In the latter case, the PC  
is incremented to the address of the following instruction before being added to the  
accumulator; otherwise the base register is not altered. Sixteen-bit addition is  
performed so a carry-out from the low-order eight bits may propagate through  
higher-order bits. No flags are affected.  
Example:  
A value between 0 and 3 is in the accumulator. The following instructions will  
translate the value in the accumulator to one of four values defined by the DB  
(define byte) directive.  
REL_PC: INC  
MOVC  
A
A, @A + PC  
RET  
DB  
DB  
DB  
DB  
66  
H
77  
H
88  
H
99  
H
If the subroutine is called with the accumulator equal to 01 , it will return with 77  
H
in the accumulator. The INC A before the MOVC instruction is needed to ”get  
H
around” the RET instruction above the table. If several bytes of code separated the  
MOVC from the table, the corresponding number would be added to the  
accumulator instead.  
MOVC  
A, @A + DPTR  
Operation:  
MOVC  
(A) ((A) + (DPTR))  
Encoding:  
1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1  
Bytes:  
1
2
Cycles:  
Semiconductor Group  
180  
Instruction Set  
MOVC  
A, @A + PC  
Operation:  
MOVC  
(PC) (PC) + 1  
(A) ((A) + (PC))  
Encoding:  
1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1  
Bytes:  
1
2
Cycles:  
Semiconductor Group  
181  
Instruction Set  
MOVX  
<dest-byte>, <src-byte>  
Function:  
Move external  
Description:  
The MOVX instructions transfer data between the accumulator and a byte of  
external data memory, hence the ”X” appended to MOV. There are two types of  
instructions, differing in whether they provide an eight bit or sixteen-bit indirect  
address to the external data RAM.  
In the first type, the contents of R0 or R1 in the current register bank provide an  
eight-bit address multiplexed with data on P0. Eight bits are sufficient for external  
l/O expansion decoding or a relatively small RAM array. For somewhat larger  
arrays, any output port pins can be used to output higher-order address bits. These  
pins would be controlled by an output instruction preceding the MOVX.  
In the second type of MOVX instructions, the data pointer generates a sixteen-bit  
address. P2 outputs the high-order eight address bits (the contents of DPH) while  
P0 multiplexes the low-order eight bits (DPL) with data. The P2 special function  
register retains its previous contents while the P2 output buffers are emitting the  
contents of DPH. This form is faster and more efficient when accessing very large  
data arrays (up to 64 Kbyte), since no additional instructions are needed to set up  
the output ports.  
It is possible in some situations to mix the two MOVX types. A large RAM array with  
its high-order address lines driven by P2 can be addressed via the data pointer, or  
with code to output high-order address bits to P2 followed by a MOVX instruction  
using R0 or R1.  
Example:  
An external 256 byte RAM using multiplexed address/data lines (e.g. an SAB 8155  
RAM/I/O/timer) is connected to the SAB 80(c)5XX port 0. Port 3 provides control  
lines for the external RAM. Ports 1 and 2 are used for normal l/O. Registers 0 and  
1 contain 12 and 34 . Location 34 of the external RAM holds the value 56 . The  
H
H
H
H
instruction sequence  
MOVX A, @R1  
MOVX @R0,A  
copies the value 56 into both the accumulator and external RAM location 12 .  
H
H
Semiconductor Group  
182  
Instruction Set  
MOVX  
A,@Ri  
MOVX  
Operation:  
(A) ((Ri))  
Encoding:  
1 1 1 0 0 0 1 i  
Bytes:  
1
2
Cycles:  
MOVX  
A,@DPTR  
Operation:  
MOVX  
(A) ((DPTR))  
Encoding:  
1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0  
Bytes:  
1
2
Cycles:  
MOVX  
@Ri,A  
Operation:  
MOVX  
((Ri)) (A)  
Encoding:  
1 1 1 1 0 0 1 i  
Bytes:  
1
2
Cycles:  
MOVX  
@DPTR,A  
Operation:  
MOVX  
((DPTR)) (A)  
Encoding:  
1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0  
Bytes:  
1
2
Cycles:  
Semiconductor Group  
183  
Instruction Set  
MUL  
AB  
Function:  
Multiply  
Description:  
MUL AB multiplies the unsigned eight-bit integers in the accumulator and register  
B. The low-order byte of the sixteen-bit product is left in the accumulator, and the  
high-order byte in B. If the product is greater than 255 (0FF ) the overflow flag is  
H
set; otherwise it is cleared. The carry flag is always cleared.  
Example:  
Originally the accumulator holds the value 80 (50 ). Register B holds the value 160  
H
(0A0 ). The instruction  
H
MUL  
AB  
will give the product 12,800 (3200 ), so B is changed to 32 (00110010B) and the  
H
H
accumulator is cleared. The overflow flag is set, carry is cleared.  
Operation:  
Encoding:  
MUL  
(A7-0)  
(B15-8)  
(A) x (B)  
1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0  
Bytes:  
1
4
Cycles:  
Semiconductor Group  
184  
Instruction Set  
NOP  
Function:  
Description:  
No operation  
Execution continues at the following instruction. Other than the PC, no registers or  
flags are affected.  
Example:  
It is desired to produce a low-going output pulse on bit 7 of port 2 lasting exactly 5  
cycles. A simple SETB/CLR sequence would generate a one-cycle pulse, so four  
additional cycles must be inserted. This may be done (assuming no interrupts are  
enabled) with the instruction sequence  
CLR P2.7  
NOP  
NOP  
NOP  
NOP  
SETB P2.7  
Operation:  
Encoding:  
NOP  
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0  
Bytes:  
1
1
Cycles:  
Semiconductor Group  
185  
Instruction Set  
ORL  
<dest-byte> <src-byte>  
Function:  
Description:  
Logical OR for byte variables  
ORL performs the bitwise logical OR operation between the indicated variables,  
storing the results in the destination byte. No flags are affected .  
The two operands allow six addressing mode combinations. When the destination  
is the accumulator, the source can use register, direct, register-indirect, or  
immediate addressing; when the destination is a direct address, the source can be  
the accumulator or immediate data.  
Note:  
When this instruction is used to modify an output port, the value used as the original  
port data will be read from the output data latch, not the input pins.  
Example:  
If the accumulator holds 0C3 (11000011B) and R0 holds 55 (01010101B) then  
the instruction  
H
H
ORL A,R0  
will leave the accumulator holding the value 0D7 (11010111B).  
H
When the destination is a directly addressed byte, the instruction can set  
combinations of bits in any RAM location or hardware register. The pattern of bits  
to be set is determined by a mask byte, which may be either a constant data value  
in the instruction or a variable computed in the accumulator at run-time. The  
instruction  
ORL  
P1,#00110010B  
will set bits 5, 4, and 1 of output port 1.  
ORL  
A,Rn  
Operation:  
ORL  
(A) (A) (Rn)  
Encoding:  
0 1 0 0 1 r r r  
Bytes:  
1
1
Cycles:  
Semiconductor Group  
186  
Instruction Set  
ORL  
A,direct  
Operation:  
ORL  
(A) (A) (direct)  
Encoding:  
0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1  
direct address  
Bytes:  
2
1
Cycles:  
ORL  
A,@Ri  
ORL  
Operation:  
(A) (A) ((Ri))  
Encoding:  
0 1 0 0 0 1 1 i  
Bytes:  
1
1
Cycles:  
ORL  
A,#data  
Operation:  
ORL  
(A) (A) #data  
Encoding:  
0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0  
immediate data  
Bytes:  
2
1
Cycles:  
ORL  
direct,A  
Operation:  
ORL  
(direct) (direct) (A)  
Encoding:  
0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0  
direct address  
Bytes:  
2
1
Cycles:  
Semiconductor Group  
187  
Instruction Set  
ORL  
direct, #data  
Operation:  
ORL  
(direct) (direct) #data  
0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1  
Encoding:  
direct address  
immediate data  
Bytes:  
3
2
Cycles:  
Semiconductor Group  
188  
Instruction Set  
ORL  
C, <src-bit>  
Logical OR for bit variables  
Function:  
Description:  
Set the carry flag if the Boolean value is a logic 1; leave the carry in its current state  
otherwise. A slash (”/”) preceding the operand in the assembly language indicates  
that the logical complement of the addressed bit is used as the source value, but  
the source bit itself is not affected. No other flags are affected.  
Example:  
Set the carry flag if, and only if, P1.0 = 1, ACC.7 = 1, or OV = 0:  
MOV  
ORL  
ORL  
C,P1.0  
C,ACC.7  
C,/OV  
; Load carry with input pin P1.0  
; OR carry with the accumulator bit 7  
; OR carry with the inverse of OV  
ORL  
C,bit  
Operation:  
ORL  
(C) (C) (bit)  
Encoding:  
0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0  
bit address  
Bytes:  
2
2
Cycles:  
ORL  
C,/bit  
Operation:  
ORL  
(C) (C) ¬ (bit)  
Encoding:  
1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0  
bit address  
Bytes:  
2
2
Cycles:  
Semiconductor Group  
189  
Instruction Set  
POP  
direct  
Pop from stack  
Function:  
Description:  
The contents of the internal RAM location addressed by the stack pointer is read,  
and the stack pointer is decremented by one. The value read is the transfer to the  
directly addressed byte indicated. No flags are affected.  
Example:  
The stack pointer originally contains the value 32 , and internal RAM locations 30  
H
H
through 32 contain the values 20 , 23 , and 01 , respectively. The instruction  
H
H
H
H
sequence  
POP  
POP  
DPH  
DPL  
will leave the stack pointer equal to the value 30 and the data pointer set to 0123 .  
H
H
At this point the instruction  
POP SP  
will leave the stack pointer set to 20 . Note that in this special case the stack pointer  
H
was decremented to 2F before being loaded with the value popped (20 ).  
H
H
Operation:  
POP  
(direct) ((SP))  
(SP) (SP) – 1  
Encoding:  
1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0  
direct address  
Bytes:  
2
2
Cycles:  
Semiconductor Group  
190  
Instruction Set  
PUSH  
direct  
Push onto stack  
Function:  
Description:  
The stack pointer is incremented by one. The contents of the indicated variable is  
then copied into the internal RAM location addressed by the stack pointer.  
Otherwise no flags are affected.  
Example:  
On entering an interrupt routine the stack pointer contains 09 . The data pointer  
H
holds the value 0123 . The instruction sequence  
H
PUSH  
PUSH  
DPL  
DPH  
will leave the stack pointer set to 0B and store 23 and 01 in internal RAM  
H
H
H
locations 0A and 0B , respectively.  
H
H
Operation:  
Encoding:  
PUSH  
(SP) (SP) + 1  
((SP)) (direct)  
1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0  
direct address  
Bytes:  
2
2
Cycles:  
Semiconductor Group  
191  
Instruction Set  
RET  
Function:  
Description:  
Return from subroutine  
RET pops the high and low-order bytes of the PC successively from the stack,  
decrementing the stack pointer by two. Program execution continues at the  
resulting address, generally the instruction immediately following an ACALL or  
LCALL. No flags are affected.  
Example:  
The stack pointer originally contains the value 0B . Internal RAM locations 0A  
H
H
and 0B contain the values 23 and 01 , respectively. The instruction  
H
H
H
RET  
will leave the stack pointer equal to the value 09 . Program execution will continue  
H
at location 0123 .  
H
Operation:  
RET  
(PC15-8) ((SP))  
(SP) (SP) – 1  
(PC7-0) ((SP))  
(SP) (SP) – 1  
Encoding:  
0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0  
Bytes:  
1
2
Cycles:  
Semiconductor Group  
192  
Instruction Set  
RETI  
Function:  
Description:  
Return from interrupt  
RETI pops the high and low-order bytes of the PC successively from the stack, and  
restores the interrupt logic to accept additional interrupts at the same priority level  
as the one just processed. The stack pointer is left decremented by two. No other  
registers are affected; the PSW is not automatically restored to its pre-interrupt  
status. Program execution continues at the resulting address, which is generally the  
instruction immediately after the point at which the interrupt request was detected.  
If a lower or same-level interrupt is pending when the RETI instruction is executed,  
that one instruction will be executed before the pending interrupt is processed.  
Example:  
The stack pointer originally contains the value 0B . An interrupt was detected  
H
during the instruction ending at location 0122 . Internal RAM locations 0A and  
H
H
0B contain the values 23 and 01 , respectively. The instruction  
H
H
H
RETI  
will leave the stack pointer equal to 09 and return program execution to location  
H
0123 .  
H
Operation:  
RETI  
(PC15-8) ((SP))  
(SP) (SP) – 1  
(PC7-0) ((SP))  
(SP) (SP) – 1  
Encoding:  
0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0  
Bytes:  
1
2
Cycles:  
Semiconductor Group  
193  
Instruction Set  
RL  
A
Function:  
Rotate accumulator left  
Description:  
The eight bits in the accumulator are rotated one bit to the left. Bit 7 is rotated into  
the bit 0 position. No flags are affected.  
Example:  
The accumulator holds the value 0C5 (11000101B). The instruction  
H
RL  
A
leaves the accumulator holding the value 8B (10001011B) with the carry  
H
unaffected.  
Operation:  
Encoding:  
RL  
(An + 1) (An) n = 0-6  
(A0) (A7)  
0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1  
Bytes:  
1
1
Cycles:  
Semiconductor Group  
194  
Instruction Set  
RLC  
A
Function:  
Rotate accumulator left through carry flag  
Description:  
Example:  
The eight bits in the accumulator and the carry flag are together rotated one bit to  
the left. Bit 7 moves into the carry flag; the original state of the carry flag moves into  
the bit 0 position. No other flags are affected.  
The accumulator holds the value 0C5 (11000101B), and the carry is zero. The  
H
instruction  
RLC  
A
leaves the accumulator holding the value 8A (10001010B) with the carry set.  
H
Operation:  
RLC  
(An + 1) (An) n = 0-6  
(A0) (C)  
(C) (A7)  
Encoding:  
0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1  
Bytes:  
1
1
Cycles:  
Semiconductor Group  
195  
Instruction Set  
RR  
A
Function:  
Rotate accumulator right  
Description:  
The eight bits in the accumulator are rotated one bit to the right. Bit 0 is rotated into  
the bit 7 position. No flags are affected.  
Example:  
The accumulator holds the value 0C5 (11000101B). The instruction  
H
RR  
A
leaves the accumulator holding the value 0E2 (11100010B) with the carry  
H
unaffected.  
Operation:  
Encoding:  
RR  
(An) (An + 1) n = 0-6  
(A7) (A0)  
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1  
Bytes:  
1
1
Cycles:  
Semiconductor Group  
196  
Instruction Set  
RRC  
A
Function:  
Rotate accumulator right through carry flag  
Description:  
Example:  
The eight bits in the accumulator and the carry flag are together rotated one bit to  
the right. Bit 0 moves into the carry flag; the original value of the carry flag moves  
into the bit 7 position. No other flags are affected.  
The accumulator holds the value 0C5 (11000101B), the carry is zero. The  
H
instruction  
RRC  
A
leaves the accumulator holding the value 62 (01100010B) with the carry set.  
H
Operation:  
RRC  
(An) (An + 1) n=0-6  
(A7) (C)  
(C) (A0)  
Encoding:  
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1  
Bytes:  
1
1
Cycles:  
Semiconductor Group  
197  
Instruction Set  
SETB  
<bit>  
Set bit  
Function:  
Description:  
SETB sets the indicated bit to one. SETB can operate on the carry flag or any  
directiy addressable bit. No other flags are affected.  
Example:  
The carry flag is cleared. Output port 1 has been written with the value 34  
H
(00110100B). The instructions  
SETB  
SETB  
C
P1.0  
will leave the carry flag set to 1 and change the data output on port 1 to 35  
(00110101B).  
H
SETB  
C
Operation:  
SETB  
(C) 1  
Encoding:  
1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1  
Bytes:  
1
1
Cycles:  
SETB  
bit  
Operation:  
SETB  
(bit) 1  
Encoding:  
1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0  
bit address  
Bytes:  
2
1
Cycles:  
Semiconductor Group  
198  
Instruction Set  
SJMP  
rel  
Function:  
Short jump  
Description:  
Program control branches unconditionally to the address indicated. The branch  
destination is computed by adding the signed displacement in the second  
instruction byte to the PC, after incrementing the PC twice. Therefore, the range of  
destinations allowed is from 128 bytes preceding this instruction to 127 bytes  
following it.  
Example:  
The label ”RELADR” is assigned to an instruction at program memory location  
0123 . The instruction  
H
SJMP  
RELADR  
will assemble into location 0100 . After the instruction is executed, the PC will  
H
contain the value 0123 .  
H
Note:  
Under the above conditions the instruction following SJMP will be at 102 .  
H
Therefore, the displacement byte of the instruction will be the relative offset (0123 -  
H
0102 ) = 21 . In other words, an SJMP with a displacement of 0FE would be a  
one-instruction infinite loop.  
H
H
H
Operation:  
Encoding:  
SJMP  
(PC) (PC) + 2  
(PC) (PC) + rel  
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0  
rel. address  
Bytes:  
2
2
Cycles:  
Semiconductor Group  
199  
Instruction Set  
SUBB  
A, <src-byte>  
Subtract with borrow  
Function:  
Description:  
SUBB subtracts the indicated variable and the carry flag together from the  
accumulator, leaving the result in the accumulator. SUBB sets the carry (borrow)  
flag if a borrow is needed for bit 7, and clears C otherwise. (If C was set before  
executing a SUBB instruction, this indicates that a borrow was needed for the  
previous step in a multiple precision subtraction, so the carry is subtracted from the  
accumulator along with the source operand). AC is set if a borrow is needed for bit  
3, and cleared otherwise. OV is set if a borrow is needed into bit 6 but not into bit 7,  
or into bit 7 but not bit 6.  
When subtracting signed integers OV indicates a negative number produced when  
a negative value is subtracted from a positive value, or a positive result when a  
positive number is subtracted from a negative number.  
The source operand allows four addressing modes: register, direct, register-  
indirect, or immediate.  
Example:  
The accumulator holds 0C9 (11001001B), register 2 holds 54 (01010100B), and  
the carry flag is set. The instruction  
H
H
SUBB  
A,R2  
will leave the value 74 (01110100B) in the accumulator, with the carry flag and AC  
H
cleared but OV set.  
Notice that 0C9 minus 54 is 75 . The difference between this and the above  
H
H
H
result is due to the (borrow) flag being set before the operation. If the state of the  
carry is not known before starting a single or multiple-precision subtraction, it should  
be explicitly cleared by a CLR C instruction.  
SUBB  
A,Rn  
Operation:  
SUBB  
(A) (A) – (C) – (Rn)  
Bytes:  
1
1
Cycles:  
Semiconductor Group  
200  
Instruction Set  
SUBB  
A,direct  
SUBB  
Operation:  
(A) (A) – (C) – (direct)  
Encoding:  
1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1  
direct address  
Bytes:  
2
1
Cycles:  
SUBB  
A, @ Ri  
Operation:  
SUBB  
(A) (A) – (C) – ((Ri))  
Encoding:  
1 0 0 1 0 1 1 i  
Bytes:  
1
1
Cycles:  
SUBB  
A, #data  
Operation:  
SUBB  
(A) (A) – (C) – #data  
Encoding:  
1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0  
immediate data  
Bytes:  
2
1
Cycles:  
Semiconductor Group  
201  
Instruction Set  
SWAP  
A
Function:  
Swap nibbles within the accumulator  
Description:  
Example:  
SWAP A interchanges the low and high-order nibbles (four-bit fields) of the  
accumulator (bits 3-0 and bits 7-4). The operation can also be thought of as a four-  
bit rotate instruction. No flags are affected.  
The accumulator holds the value 0C5 (11000101B). The instruction  
H
SWAP  
A
leaves the accumulator holding the value 5C (01011100B).  
H
Operation:  
Encoding:  
SWAP  
(A3-0)  
(A7-4), (A7-4) (A3-0)  
1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0  
Bytes:  
1
1
Cycles:  
Semiconductor Group  
202  
Instruction Set  
XCH  
A, <byte>  
Exchange accumulator with byte variable  
Function:  
Description:  
XCH loads the accumulator with the contents of the indicated variable, at the same  
time writing the original accumulator contents to the indicated variable. The source/  
destination operand can use register, direct, or register-indirect addressing.  
Example:  
R0 contains the address 20 . The accumulator holds the value 3F (00111111B).  
H
H
Internal RAM location 20 holds the value 75 (01110101B). The instruction  
H
H
XCH  
A, @R0  
will leave RAM location 20 holding the value 3F (00111111 B) and 75  
(01110101B) in the accumulator.  
H
H
H
XCH  
A,Rn  
Operation:  
XCH  
(A)  
(Rn)  
Encoding:  
1 1 0 0 1 r r r  
Bytes:  
1
1
Cycles:  
XCH  
A,direct  
Operation:  
XCH  
(A)  
(direct)  
Encoding:  
1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1  
direct address  
Bytes:  
2
1
Cycles:  
Semiconductor Group  
203  
Instruction Set  
XCH  
A, @ Ri  
Operation:  
XCH  
(A)  
((Ri))  
Encoding:  
1 1 0 0 0 1 1 i  
Bytes:  
1
1
Cycles:  
Semiconductor Group  
204  
Instruction Set  
XCHD  
A,@Ri  
Exchange digit  
Function:  
Description:  
XCHD exchanges the low-order nibble of the accumulator (bits 3-0, generally  
representing a hexadecimal or BCD digit), with that of the internal RAM location  
indirectly addressed by the specified register. The high-order nibbles (bits 7-4) of  
each register are not affected. No flags are affected.  
Example:  
R0 contains the address 20 . The accumulator holds the value 36 (00110110B).  
H
H
Internal RAM location 20 holds the value 75 (01110101B). The instruction  
H
H
XCHD  
A, @ R0  
will leave RAM location 20 holding the value 76 (01110110B) and 35  
(00110101B) in the accumulator.  
H
H
H
Operation:  
Encoding:  
XCHD  
(A3-0)  
((Ri)3-0)  
1 1 0 1 0 1 1 i  
Bytes:  
1
1
Cycles:  
Semiconductor Group  
205  
Instruction Set  
XRL  
<dest-byte>, <src-byte>  
Function:  
Description:  
Logical Exclusive OR for byte variables  
XRL performs the bitwise logical Exclusive OR operation between the indicated  
variables, storing the results in the destination. No flags are affected.  
The two operands allow six addressing mode combinations. When the destination  
is the accumulator, the source can use register, direct, register-indirect, or  
immediate addressing; when the destination is a direct address, the source can be  
accumulator or immediate data.  
Note:  
When this instruction is used to modify an output port, the value used as the original  
port data will be read from the output data latch, not the input pins.  
Example:  
If the accumulator holds 0C3 (11000011B) and register 0 holds 0AA  
(10101010B) then the instruction  
H
H
XRL  
A,R0  
will leave the accumulator holding the value 69 (01101001B).  
H
When the destination is a directly addressed byte, this instruction can complement  
combinations of bits in any RAM location or hardware register. The pattern of bits  
to be complemented is then determined by a mask byte, either a constant contained  
in the instruction or a variable computed in the accumulator at run-time. The  
instruction  
XRL  
P1,#00110001B  
will complement bits 5, 4, and 0 of output port 1.  
XRL  
A,Rn  
Operation:  
XRL2  
(A) (A) v (Rn)  
Encoding:  
0 1 1 0 1 r r r  
Bytes:  
1
1
Cycles:  
Semiconductor Group  
206  
Instruction Set  
XRL  
A,direct  
Operation:  
XRL  
(A) (A) v (direct)  
Encoding:  
0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1  
direct address  
Bytes:  
2
1
Cycles:  
XRL  
A, @ Ri  
Operation:  
XRL  
(A) (A) v ((Ri))  
0 1 1 0 0 1 1 i  
Encoding:  
Bytes:  
1
1
Cycles:  
XRL  
A, #data  
Operation:  
XRL  
(A) (A) v #data  
Encoding:  
0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0  
immediate data  
Bytes:  
2
1
Cycles:  
XRL  
direct,A  
Operation:  
XRL  
(direct) (direct) v (A)  
Encoding:  
0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0  
direct address  
Bytes:  
2
1
Cycles:  
Semiconductor Group  
207  
Instruction Set  
XRL  
direct, #data  
Operation:  
XRL  
(direct) (direct) v #data  
0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1  
Encoding:  
direct address  
immediate data  
Bytes:  
3
2
Cycles:  
Semiconductor Group  
208  
Instruction Set  
Instruction Set Summary  
Mnemonic  
Description  
Byte  
Cycle  
Arithmetic Operations  
ADD  
ADD  
ADD  
ADD  
A,Rn  
Add register to accumulator  
Add direct byte to accumulator  
Add indirect RAM to accumulator  
Add immediate data to accumulator  
Add register to accumulator with carry flag  
Add direct byte to A with carry flag  
Add indirect RAM to A with carry flag  
Add immediate data to A with carry flag  
Subtract register from A with borrow  
Subtract direct byte from A with borrow  
Subtract indirect RAM from A with borrow  
Subtract immediate data from A with borrow  
Increment accumulator  
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
4
4
1
A,direct  
A, @Ri  
A,#data  
ADDC A,Rn  
ADDC A,direct  
ADDC A, @Ri  
ADDC A, #data  
SUBB A,Rn  
SUBB A,direct  
SUBB A,@Ri  
SUBB A,#data  
INC  
INC  
INC  
INC  
DEC  
DEC  
DEC  
DEC  
INC  
MUL  
DIV  
A
Rn  
Increment register  
direct  
@Ri  
A
Increment direct byte  
Increment indirect RAM  
Decrement accumulator  
Rn  
Decrement register  
direct  
@Ri  
DPTR  
AB  
Decrement direct byte  
Decrement indirect RAM  
Increment data pointer  
Multiply A and B  
AB  
Divide A by B  
DA  
A
Decimal adjust accumulator  
Semiconductor Group  
209  
Instruction Set  
Instruction Set Summary (cont’d)  
Mnemonic  
Description  
Byte  
Cycle  
Logic Operations  
ANL  
ANL  
ANL  
ANL  
ANL  
ANL  
ORL  
ORL  
ORL  
ORL  
ORL  
ORL  
XRL  
XRL  
XRL  
XRL  
XRL  
XRL  
CLR  
CPL  
RL  
A,Rn  
AND register to accumulator  
1
2
1
2
2
3
1
2
1
2
2
3
1
2
1
2
2
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
A,direct  
A,@Ri  
A,#data  
direct,A  
direct,#data  
A,Rn  
AND direct byte to accumulator  
AND indirect RAM to accumulator  
AND immediate data to accumulator  
AND accumulator to direct byte  
AND immediate data to direct byte  
OR register to accumulator  
A,direct  
A,@Ri  
A,#data  
direct,A  
direct,#data  
A,Rn  
OR direct byte to accumulator  
OR indirect RAM to accumulator  
OR immediate data to accumulator  
OR accumulator to direct byte  
OR immediate data to direct byte  
Exclusive OR register to accumulator  
Exclusive OR direct byte to accumulator  
Exclusive OR indirect RAM to accumulator  
Exclusive OR immediate data to accumulator  
Exclusive OR accumulator to direct byte  
Exclusive OR immediate data to direct byte  
Clear accumulator  
A direct  
A,@Ri  
A,#data  
direct,A  
direct,#data  
A
A
Complement accumulator  
A
Rotate accumulator left  
RLC  
RR  
A
Rotate accumulator left through carry  
Rotate accumulator right  
A
RRC  
A
Rotate accumulator right through carry  
Swap nibbles within the accumulator  
SWAP A  
Semiconductor Group  
210  
Instruction Set  
Instruction Set Summary (cont’d)  
Mnemonic  
Description  
Byte  
Cycle  
Data Transfer  
MOV A,Rn  
MOV A,direct *)  
Move register to accumulator  
1
2
1
2
1
2
2
2
2
3
2
3
1
2
2
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
2
2
2
1
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
Move direct byte to accumulator  
Move indirect RAM to accumulator  
Move immediate data to accumulator  
Move accumulator to register  
MOV A,@Ri  
MOV A,#data  
MOV Rn,A  
MOV Rn,direct  
MOV Rn,#data  
MOV direct,A  
MOV direct,Rn  
MOV direct,direct  
MOV direct,@Ri  
MOV direct,#data  
MOV @Ri,A  
Move direct byte to register  
Move immediate data to register  
Move accumulator to direct byte  
Move register to direct byte  
Move direct byte to direct byte  
Move indirect RAM to direct byte  
Move immediate data to direct byte  
Move accumulator to indirect RAM  
Move direct byte to indirect RAM  
Move immediate data to indirect RAM  
MOV @Ri,direct  
MOV @Ri, #data  
MOV DPTR, #data16 Load data pointer with a 16-bit constant  
MOVC A,@A + DPTR Move code byte relative to DPTR to accumulator  
MOVC A,@A + PC  
MOVX A,@Ri  
Move code byte relative to PC to accumulator  
Move external RAM (8-bit addr.) to A  
Move external RAM (16-bit addr.) to A  
Move A to external RAM (8-bit addr.)  
Move A to external RAM (16-bit addr.)  
Push direct byte onto stack  
MOVX A,@DPTR  
MOVX @Ri,A  
MOVX @DPTR,A  
PUSH direct  
POP  
XCH  
XCH  
XCH  
direct  
Pop direct byte from stack  
A,Rn  
Exchange register with accumulator  
Exchange direct byte with accumulator  
Exchange indirect RAM with accumulator  
Exchange low-order nibble indir. RAM with A  
A,direct  
A,@Ri  
XCHD A,@Ri  
*) MOV A,ACC is not a valid instruction  
Semiconductor Group  
211  
Instruction Set  
Instruction Set Summary (cont’d)  
Mnemonic  
Description  
Byte  
Cycle  
Boolean Variable Manipulation  
CLR  
C
Clear carry flag  
1
2
1
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
1
2
CLR  
bit  
C
Clear direct bit  
SETB  
Set carry flag  
SETB bit  
Set direct bit  
CPL  
CPL  
ANL  
ANL  
ORL  
ORL  
C
Complement carry flag  
Complement direct bit  
AND direct bit to carry flag  
AND complement of direct bit to carry  
OR direct bit to carry flag  
OR complement of direct bit to carry  
Move direct bit to carry flag  
Move carry flag to direct bit  
bit  
C,bit  
C,/bit  
C,bit  
C,/bit  
MOV C,bit  
MOV bit,C  
Program and Machine Control  
ACALL addr11  
LCALL addr16  
RET  
Absolute subroutine call  
2
3
1
1
2
3
2
1
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Long subroutine call  
Return from subroutine  
RETI  
Return from interrupt  
AJMP addr11  
LJMP addr16  
SJMP rel  
Absolute jump  
Long iump  
Short jump (relative addr.)  
Jump indirect relative to the DPTR  
Jump if accumulator is zero  
Jump if accumulator is not zero  
Jump if carry flag is set  
JMP  
JZ  
@A + DPTR  
rel  
JNZ  
JC  
rel  
rel  
JNC  
JB  
rel  
Jump if carry flag is not set  
Jump if direct bit is set  
bit,rel  
bit,rel  
bit,rel  
JNB  
JBC  
Jump if direct bit is not set  
Jump if direct bit is set and clear bit  
Compare direct byte to A and jump if not equal  
CJNE A,direct,rel  
Semiconductor Group  
212  
Instruction Set  
Instruction Set Summary (cont’d)  
Mnemonic  
Description  
Byte  
Cycle  
Program and Machine Control (cont’d)  
CJNE A,#data,rel  
CJNE Rn,#data rel  
CJNE @Ri,#data,rel  
DJNZ Rn,rel  
Compare immediate to A and jump if not equal  
3
3
3
2
3
1
2
2
2
2
2
1
Compare immed. to reg. and jump if not equal  
Compare immed. to ind. and jump if not equal  
Decrement register and jump if not zero  
Decrement direct byte and jump if not zero  
No operation  
DJNZ direct,rel  
NOP  
Semiconductor Group  
213  
High-Performance  
8-Bit CMOS Single-Chip Microcontroller  
SAB 80C515/80C535  
Preliminary  
SAB 80C515/80C515-16  
SAB 80C535/80C535-16  
CMOS microcontroller with factory mask-programmable ROM  
CMOS microcontroller for external ROM  
8 K × 8 ROM (SAB 80C515 only)  
256 × 8 RAM  
Six 8-bit I/O ports, one input port for  
digital or analog input  
Boolean processor  
Most instructions execute in 1 µs (750 ns)  
4 µs (3 µs) multiply and divide  
External memory expandable up to  
128 Kbytes  
Three 16-bit timer/counters  
Highly flexible reload, capture, compare  
Backwardly compatible with SAB 8051  
Functionally compatible with SAB 80515  
capabilities  
Full-duplex serial channel  
Idle and power-down mode  
Twelve interrupt vectors, four priority  
Plastic leaded chip carrier package:  
levels  
P-LCC-68  
8-bit A/D converter with 8 multiplexed  
inputs and programmable internal  
reference voltages  
Plastic Metric Quad Flat Package  
P-MQFP-80  
Two temperature ranges available:  
16-bit watchdog timer  
0 to 70 °C  
(for 12, 16, 20 MHz)  
– 40 to 85 °C (for 12, 16 MHz)  
The SAB 80C515/80C535 is a powerful member of the Siemens SAB 8051 family  
of 8-bit microcontrollers. It is designed in Siemens ACMOS technology and is functionally  
compatible with the SAB 80515/80535 devices designed in MYMOS technology.  
The SAB 80C515/80C535 is a stand-alone, high-performance single-chip microcontroller  
based on the SAB 8051/80C51 architecture. While maintaining all the SAB 80C51 operating  
characteristics, the SAB 80C515/80C535 incorporates several enhancements which  
significantly increase design flexibility and overall system performance.  
In addition, the low-power properties of Siemens ACMOS technology allow applications where  
power consumption and dissipation are critical. Furthermore, the SAB 80C515/80C535 has  
two software-selectable modes of reduced activity for further power reduction: idle and power-  
down mode.  
The SAB 80C535 is identical with the SAB 80C515 except that it lacks the on-chip program  
memory. The SAB 80C515/80C535 is supplied in a 68-pin plastic leaded chip carrier package  
(P-LCC-68) or in a plastic metric quad flat package (P-MQFP-80).  
There are versions for 12, 16 and 20 MHz operation and for extended temperature ranges – 40  
to 85 °C. Versions for extended temperature range – 40 to + 110 °C are available on request.  
Semiconductor Group  
214  
Device Specifications  
Semiconductor Group  
215  
Device Specifications  
Ordering Information  
Type  
Ordering  
Code  
Package  
Description  
8-Bit CMOS Microcontroller  
SAB 80C515-N  
Q 67120-DXXXX P-LCC-68  
with mask-programmable ROM,  
12 MHz  
SAB 80C535-N  
Q 67120-C0508 P-LCC-68  
Q 67120-DXXXX P-LCC-68  
for external memory, 12 MHz  
SAB 80C515-N-T40/85  
with mask-programmable ROM,  
12 MHz  
ext. temperature – 40 to + 85 °C  
SAB 80C535-N-T40/85  
SAB 80C515-16-N  
SAB 80C535-16-N  
Q 67120-C0510 P-LCC-68  
Q 67120-DXXXX P-LCC-68  
for external memory, 12 MHz  
ext. temperature – 40 to + 85 °C  
with mask-programmable ROM,  
16 MHz  
Q 67120-C0509 P-LCC-68  
Q 67120-C0562 P-LCC-68  
for external memory, 16 MHz  
SAB 80C535-16-N-  
T40/85  
for external memory, 16 MHz  
ext. temperature – 40 to + 85 °C  
SAB 80C535-20-N  
SAB 80C535-M  
SAB 80C515-M  
Q 67120-C0778 P-LCC-68  
for external memory, 20 MHz  
Q67120-C0857  
P-MQFP-80 for external memory, 12 MHz  
Q67120-DXXXX P-MQFP-80 with mask-programmable ROM,  
12 MHz  
SAB 80C535-M-T40/85  
SAB 80C515-M-T40/85  
Q67120-C0937  
P-MQFP-80 for external memory, 12 MHz  
ext. temperature – 40 to + 85 °C  
Q67120-DXXXX P-MQFP-80 with mask-programmable ROM,  
12 MHz  
ext. temperature – 40 to + 85 °C  
Notes: Versions for extended temperature range – 40 to + 110 °C on request.  
The ordering number of ROM types (DXXXX extension) is defined after program release  
(verification) of the customer.  
Semiconductor Group  
216  
Device Specifications  
Pin Configuration  
(P-LCC-68)  
Semiconductor Group  
217  
Device Specifications  
80  
75  
70  
65  
61  
RESET  
N.C.  
VAREF  
1
5
60  
55  
50  
P5.7  
P0.7 / AD7  
P0.6 / AD6  
P0.5 / AD5  
P0.4 / AD4  
P0.3 / AD3  
P0.2 / AD2  
P0.1 / AD1  
P0.0 / AD0  
N.C.  
N.C.  
EA  
ALE  
PSEN  
VAGND  
P6.7 / AIN7  
P6.6 / AIN6  
P6.5 / AIN5  
P6.4 / AIN4  
P6.3 / AIN3  
P6.2 / AIN2  
P6.1 / AIN1  
P6.0 / AIN0  
N.C.  
SAB 80C535 / 80C515  
10  
15  
20  
P-MQFP-80  
Package  
N.C.  
P3.0 / RXD0  
P3.1 / TXD0  
P3.2 / INT0  
P3.3 / INT1  
P3.4 / T0  
P3.5 / T1  
N.C.  
45  
41  
P2.7 / A15  
P2.6 / A14  
P2.5 / A13  
P2.4 / A12  
P2.3 / A11  
21  
25  
30  
35  
40  
N.C. pins must not be connected.  
Pin Configuration  
(P-MQFP-80)  
Semiconductor Group  
218  
Device Specifications  
Logic Symbol  
Semiconductor Group  
219  
Device Specifications  
Pin Definitions and Functions  
Symbol  
Pin  
Pin  
Input (I)  
Function  
Port 4  
P-LCC-68 P-MQFP-80 Output (O)  
P4.0-P4.7 1-3, 5-9  
72-74,  
76-80  
I/O  
is an 8-bit bidirectional I/O port with  
internal pullup resistors. Port 4 pins that  
have 1’s written to them are pulled high by  
the internal pullup resistors, and in that  
state can be used as inputs. As inputs,  
port 4 pins being externally pulled low will  
source current (I , in the DC  
I L  
characteristics) because of the internal  
pullup resistors.  
PE  
4
75  
I
I
Power saving mode enable  
A low level on this pin enables the use of  
the power saving modes (idle mode and  
power-down mode). When PE is held on  
high level it is impossible to enter the  
power saving modes.  
RESET  
10  
1
Reset pin  
A low level on this pin for the duration of  
two machine cycles while the oscillator is  
running resets the SAB 80C515. A small  
internal pullup resistor permits power-on  
reset using only a capacitor connected  
to V  
.
SS  
V
V
11  
12  
3
Reference voltage for the A/D converter  
AREF  
4
Reference ground for the A/D converter  
AGND  
P6.7-P6.0 13-20  
5-12  
Port 6  
is an 8-bit undirectional input port. Port  
pins can be used for digital input if voltage  
levels simultaneously meet the  
specifications for high/low input voltages  
and for the eight multiplexed analog inputs  
of the A/D converter.  
Semiconductor Group  
220  
Device Specifications  
Pin Definitions and Functions (cont’d)  
Symbol  
Pin  
Pin  
Input (I)  
Function  
Port 3  
P-LCC-68 P-MQFP-80 Output (O)  
P3.0-P3.7 21-28  
15-22  
I/O  
is an 8-bit bidirectional I/O port with  
internal pullup resistors. Port 3 pins that  
have1's written to them are pulled high by  
the internal pullup resistors, and in that  
state can be used as inputs. As inputs,  
port 3 pins being externally pulled low will  
source current (IIL, in the DC  
characteristics) because of the internal  
pullup resistors. Port 3 also contains the  
interrupt, timer, serial port and external  
memory strobe pins that are used by  
various options. The output latch  
corresponding to a secondary function  
must be programmed to a one (1) for that  
function to operate. The secondary  
functions are assigned to the pins of port  
3, as follows:  
– R×D (P3.0): serial port's receiver data  
input (asynchronous) or data input/  
output (synchronous)  
– T×D (P3.1): serial port's transmitter data  
output  
(asynchronous) or clock output  
(synchronous)  
– INT0 (P3.2): interrupt 0 input/timer 0  
gate control input  
– INT1 (P3.3): interrupt 1 input/timer 1  
gate control input  
– T0 (P3.4): counter 0 input  
– T1 (P3.5): counter 1 input  
– WR (P3.6): the write control signal  
latches the data byte from port 0 into the  
external data memory  
– RD (P3.7): the read control signal  
enables the external data memory to  
port 0  
Semiconductor Group  
221  
Device Specifications  
Pin Definitions and Functions (cont’d)  
Symbol  
Pin  
Pin  
Input (I)  
Function  
Port 1  
P-LCC-68 P-MQFP-80 Output (O)  
P1.7-P1.0 29-36  
24-31  
I/O  
is an 8-bit bidirectional I/O port with  
internal pullup resistors. Port 1 pins that  
have 1’s written to them are pulled high by  
the internal pullup resistors, and in that  
state can be used as inputs. As inputs,  
port 1 pins being externally pulled low will  
source current (II L in the DC  
characteristics) because of the internal  
pullup resistors. The port is used for the  
low-order address byte during program  
verification. Port 1 also contains the  
interrupt, timer, clock, capture and  
compare pins that are used by various  
options. The output latch corresponding to  
a secondary function must be  
programmed to a one (1) for that function  
to operate (except when used for the  
compare functions). The secondary  
functions are assigned to the port 1 pins  
as follows:  
– INT3/CC0 (P1.0): interrupt 3 input/  
compare 0 output/capture 0 input  
– INT4/CC1 (P1.1): interrupt 4 input/  
compare 1 output/capture 1 input  
– INT5/CC2 (P1.2): interrupt 5 input/  
compare 2 output/capture 2 input  
– INT6/CC3 (P1.3): interrupt 6 input/  
compare 3 output/capture 3 input  
– INT2 (P1.4): interrupt 2 input  
– T2EX (P1.5): timer 2 external reload  
trigger input  
– CLKOUT (P1.6): system clock output  
– T2 (P1.7): counter 2 input  
Semiconductor Group  
222  
Device Specifications  
Pin Definitions and Functions (cont’d)  
Symbol  
Pin  
Pin  
Input (I)  
Function  
XTAL2  
P-LCC-68 P-MQFP-80 Output (O)  
XTAL2  
XTAL1  
39  
40  
36  
37  
Input to the inverting oscillator amplifier  
and input to the internal clock generator  
circuits.  
XTAL1  
Output of the inverting oscillator amplifier.  
To drive the device from an external clock  
source, XTAL2 should be driven, while  
XTAL1 is left unconnected. There are no  
requirements on the duty cycle of the  
external clock signal, since the input to the  
internal clocking circuitry is divided down  
by a divide-by-two flip-flop. Minimum and  
maximum high and low times and rise/fall  
times specified in the AC characteristics  
must be observed.  
P2.0-P2.7 41-48  
38-45  
I/O  
Port 2  
is an 8-bit bidirectional I/O port with  
internal pullup resistors. Port 2 pins that  
have 1’s written to them are pulled high by  
the internal pullup resistors, and in that  
state can be used as inputs. As inputs,  
port 2 pins being externally pulled low will  
source current (I I L, in the DC  
characteristics) because of the internal  
pullup resistors.  
Port 2 emits the high-order address byte  
during fetches from external program  
memory and during accesses to external  
data memory that use 16-bit addresses  
(MOVX@DPTR). In this application it  
uses strong internal pullup resistors when  
issuing 1’s. During accesses to external  
data memory that use 8-bit addresses  
(MOVX@Ri), port 2 issues the contents of  
the P2 special function register.  
Semiconductor Group  
223  
Device Specifications  
Pin Definitions and Functions (cont’d)  
Symbol  
Pin  
Pin  
Input (I)  
Function  
P-LCC-68 P-MQFP-80 Output (O)  
PSEN  
49  
47  
O
The Program store enable  
output is a control signal that enables the  
external program memory to the bus  
during external fetch operations. It is  
activated every six oscillator periods,  
except during external data memory  
accesses. The signal remains high during  
internal program execution.  
ALE  
EA  
50  
51  
48  
49  
O
The Address latch enable  
output is used for latching the address into  
external memory during normal operation.  
It is activated every six oscillator periods,  
except during an external data memory  
access.  
I
External access enable  
When held high, the SAB 80C515  
executes instructions from the internal  
ROM as long as the PC is less than 8192.  
When held low, the SAB 80C515 fetches  
all instructions from external program  
memory. For the SAB 80C535 this pin  
must be tied low.  
P0.0-P0.7 52-59  
52-59  
I/O  
Port 0  
is an 8-bit open-drain bidirectional I/O  
port.  
Port 0 pins that have 1’s written to them  
float, and in that state can be used as  
high-impedance inputs.  
Port 0 is also the multiplexed low-order  
address and data bus during accesses to  
external program and data memory. In  
this application it uses strong internal  
pullup resistors when issuing 1’s.  
Port 0 also outputs the code bytes during  
program verification in the SAB 80C515.  
External pullup resistors are required  
during program verification.  
Semiconductor Group  
224  
Device Specifications  
Pin Definitions and Functions (cont’d)  
Symbol  
Pin  
Pin  
Input (I)  
Function  
P-LCC-68 P-MQFP-80 Output (O)  
P5.7-P5.0 60-67  
60-67  
I/O  
Port 5 is an 8-bit bidirectional I/O port with  
internal pullup resistors. Port 5 pins that  
have 1’s written to them are pulled high by  
the internal pullup resistors, and in that  
state can be used as inputs. As inputs,  
port 5 pins being externally pulled low will  
source current  
(I in the DC characteristics) because of  
IL  
the internal pullup resistors.  
V
37  
33  
Supply voltage  
CC  
during normal, idle, and power-down  
operation. Internally connected to pin 68.  
V
V
38  
68  
34  
69  
Ground (0 V)  
SS  
Supply voltage  
CC  
during normal, idle, and power-down  
operation. Internally connected to pin 37.  
N. C.  
2, 13, 14,  
23, 32, 35,  
46, 50, 51,  
68, 70, 71  
Not connected  
These pins of the P-MQFP-80 package  
must not be connected  
Semiconductor Group  
225  
Device Specifications  
Figure 1  
Block Diagram  
Semiconductor Group  
226  
Device Specifications  
Functional Description  
The members of the SAB 80515 family of microcontrollers are:  
– SAB 80C515:  
Microcontroller, designed in Siemens ACMOS technology, with  
8 Kbyte factory mask-programmable ROM  
ROM-less version of the SAB 80C515  
Microcontroller, designed in Siemens MYMOS technology, with  
8 Kbyte factory mask-programmable ROM  
– SAB 80C535:  
– SAB 80515:  
– SAB 80535:  
ROM-less version of the SAB 80515  
The SAB 80C535 is identical to the SAB 80C515, except that it lacks the on-chip ROM.  
In this data sheet the term "SAB 80C515" is used to refer to both the SAB 80C515 and  
SAB 80C535, unless otherwise noted.  
Principles of Architecture  
The architecture of the SAB 80C515 is based on the SAB 8051/SAB 80C51 microcontroller  
family. The following features of the SAB 80C515 are fully compatible with the SAB 80C51  
features:  
– Instruction set  
– External memory expansion interface (port 0 and port 2)  
– Full-duplex serial port  
– Timer/counter 0 and 1  
– Alternate functions on port 3  
– The lower 128 bytes of internal RAM and the lower 4 Kbytes of internal ROM  
The SAB 80C515 additionally contains 128 bytes of internal RAM and 4 Kbytes of internal  
ROM, which results in a total of 256 bytes of RAM and 8 Kbytes of ROM on-chip.  
The SAB 80C515 has a new 16-bit timer/counter with a 2:1 prescaler, reload mode, compare  
and capture capability. It also contains at 16-bit watchdog timer, an 8-bit A/D converter with  
programmable reference voltages, two additional quasi-bidirectional 8-bit ports, one 8-bit input  
port for analog or digital signals, and a programmable clock output (f  
/12).  
OSC  
Furthermore, the SAB 80C515 has a powerful interrupt structure with 12 vectors and 4  
programmable priority levels.  
Figure 1 shows a block diagram of the SAB 80C515.  
Semiconductor Group  
227  
Device Specifications  
CPU  
The SAB 80C515 is efficient both as a controller and as an arithmetic processor. It has  
extensive facilities for binary and BCD arithmetic and excels in its bit-handling capabilities.  
Efficient use of program memory results from an instruction set consisting of 44 % one-byte,  
41 % two-byte, and 15 % three-byte instructions. With a 12 MHz crystal, 58 % of the  
instructions execute in 1.0 µs.  
Memory Organization  
The SAB 80C515 manipulates operands in the four memory address spaces described below:  
Figure 1 illustrates the memory address spaces of the SAB 80C515.  
Program Memory  
The SAB 80C515 has 8 Kbyte of on-chip ROM, while the SAB 80C535 has no internal ROM.  
The program memory can be externally expanded up to 64 Kbytes. If the EA pin is held high,  
the SAB 80C515 executes out of internal ROM unless the address exceeds 1FFF . Locations  
H
2000 through 0FFFF are then fetched from the external program memory. If the EA pin is  
H
H
held now, the SAB 80C515 fetches all instructions from the external program memory. Since  
the SAB 80C535 has no internal ROM, pin EA must be tied low when using this component.  
Data Memory  
The data memory address space consists of an internal and an external memory space. The  
internal data memory is divided into three physically separate and distinct blocks:  
the lower 128 bytes of RAM, the upper 128 bytes of RAM, and the 128 byte special function  
register (SRF) area. While the upper 128 bytes of data memory and the SFR area share the  
same address locations, they are accessed through different addressing modes. The lower 128  
bytes of data memory can be accessed through direct or register indirect addressing; the upper  
128 bytes of RAM can be accessed through register indirect addressing; the special function  
registers are accessible through direct addressing.  
Four 8-register banks, each bank consisting of eight 8-bit multi-purpose registers, occupy  
locations 0 through 1F in the lower RAM area. The next 16 bytes, locations 20 through 2F ,  
H
H
H
contain 128 directly addressable bit locations. The stack can be located anywhere in the  
internal data memory address space, and the stack depth can be expanded up to 256 bytes.  
The external data memory can be expanded up to 64 Kbytes and can be accessed by  
instructions that use a 16-bit or an 8-bit address.  
Semiconductor Group  
228  
Device Specifications  
Figure 2  
Memory Address Spaces  
Semiconductor Group  
229  
Device Specifications  
Special Function Registers  
All registers, except the program counter and the four general purpose register banks, reside  
in the special function register area. The special function registers include arithmetic registers,  
pointers, and registers that provide an interface between the CPU and the on-chip peripherals.  
There are also 128 directly addressable bits within the SFR area. All special function registers  
are listed in table 1 and table 2.  
In table 1 they are organized in numeric order of their addresses. In table 3 they are organized  
in groups which refer to the functional blocks of the SAB 80C515.  
Table 1: Special Function Register  
Address  
Register  
Contents  
Address  
Register  
Contents  
after Reset  
after Reset  
1)  
P0 1)  
SP  
DPL  
DPH  
reserved  
reserved  
reserved  
PCON  
SCON  
SBUF  
80  
81  
82  
83  
84  
85  
86  
87  
0FF  
98  
99  
9A  
9B  
9C  
9D  
9E  
9F  
00  
H
H
H
H
2)  
XX  
07  
H
H
H
H
2)  
XX  
00  
reserved  
reserved  
reserved  
reserved  
reserved  
reserved  
H
H
H
H
2)  
XX  
00  
H
H
H
H
2)  
XX  
2)  
XX  
H
H
H
H
2)  
XX  
2)  
XX  
H
H
H
H
2)  
2)  
XX  
XX  
H
H
H
H
2)  
2)  
XX  
000X 0000  
H
B
H
H
TCON 1)  
TMOD  
TL0  
TL1  
TH0  
TH1  
reserved  
reserved  
P2 1)  
88  
89  
8A  
8B  
8C  
8D  
8E  
8F  
00  
00  
00  
00  
00  
00  
A0  
0FF  
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
2)  
XX  
A1  
reserved  
reserved  
reserved  
reserved  
reserved  
reserved  
reserved  
H
H
H
2)  
XX  
A2  
H
H
H
2)  
XX  
A3  
H
H
H
2)  
XX  
A4  
H
H
H
2)  
XX  
A5  
H
H
H
2)  
2)  
2)  
XX  
XX  
XX  
A6  
H
H
H
H
H
2)  
XX  
A7  
H
H
H
P1 1)  
IEN0 1)  
IP0  
90  
91  
92  
93  
94  
95  
96  
97  
0FF  
A8  
00  
H
H
H
H
2)  
2)  
2)  
2)  
2)  
2)  
2)  
2)  
XX  
A9  
X000 0000  
reserved  
reserved  
reserved  
reserved  
reserved  
reserved  
reserved  
H
H
H
B
2)  
2)  
2)  
2)  
2)  
2)  
XX  
AA  
AB  
AC  
AD  
XX  
XX  
XX  
XX  
XX  
XX  
reserved  
reserved  
reserved  
reserved  
reserved  
reserved  
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
XX  
H
H
H
XX  
H
H
H
XX  
H
H
H
XX  
AE  
H
H
H
XX  
AF  
H
H
H
1) Bit-addressable Special Function Register  
2) X means that the value is indeterminate and the location is reserved  
Semiconductor Group  
230  
Device Specifications  
Table 1:Special Function Register (cont’d)  
Address  
Register  
Contents  
Address  
Register  
Contents  
after Reset  
after Reset  
B0  
P3 1)  
0FF  
D0  
PSW 1)  
00  
H
H
H
H
2)  
2)  
B1  
B2  
B3  
B4  
B5  
B6  
B7  
reserved  
reserved  
reserved  
reserved  
reserved  
reserved  
reserved  
XX  
XX  
XX  
XX  
XX  
XX  
XX  
D1  
D2  
D3  
D4  
D5  
D6  
D7  
reserved  
reserved  
reserved  
reserved  
reserved  
reserved  
reserved  
XX  
XX  
XX  
XX  
XX  
XX  
XX  
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
2)  
2)  
2)  
2)  
2)  
2)  
2)  
2)  
2)  
2)  
2)  
2)  
2)  
B8  
IEN1 1)  
IP1  
00  
D8  
ADCON1)  
ADDAT  
DAPR  
00X0 0000  
B
H
H
H
2)  
B9  
XX00 0000  
D9  
00  
00  
H
B
H
H
2
BA  
BB  
BC  
BD  
BS  
BF  
reserved  
reserved  
reserved  
reserved  
reserved  
reserved  
XX  
XX  
XX  
XX  
XX  
XX  
)
)
)
)
)
DA  
DB  
DC  
DD  
DE  
DF  
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
2
2
2
2
2)  
2)  
2)  
2)  
2)  
P6  
XX  
XX  
XX  
XX  
XX  
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
reserved  
reserved  
reserved  
reserved  
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
2)  
1)  
C0  
C1  
C2  
C3  
C4  
C5  
C6  
C7  
IRCON 1)  
CCEN  
CCL1  
CCH1  
CCL2  
CCH2  
CCL3  
CCH3  
00  
E0  
ACC  
00  
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
2)  
2)  
2)  
2)  
2)  
2)  
2)  
00  
00  
00  
00  
00  
00  
00  
E1  
E2  
E3  
E4  
E5  
E6  
E7  
reserved  
reserved  
reserved  
reserved  
reserved  
reserved  
reserved  
XX  
XX  
XX  
XX  
XX  
XX  
XX  
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
C8  
C9  
CA  
CB  
CC  
CD  
T2CON 1)  
reserved  
CRCL  
CRCH  
TL2  
TH2  
reserved  
reserved  
00  
XX  
E8  
E9  
EA  
EB  
EC  
ED  
P4 1)  
0FF  
H
H
H
H
2)  
2)  
2)  
2)  
2)  
2)  
2)  
2)  
reserved  
reserved  
reserved  
reserved  
reserved  
reserved  
reserved  
XX  
XX  
XX  
XX  
XX  
XX  
XX  
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
00  
00  
00  
00  
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
2)  
2)  
CE  
CF  
XX  
XX  
EE  
EF  
H
H
1) Bit-addressable Special Function Register  
2) X means that the value is indeterminate and the location is reserved  
Semiconductor Group  
231  
Device Specifications  
Table 1:Special Function Register (cont’d)  
Address  
Register  
Contents  
Address  
Register  
Contents  
after Reset  
after Reset  
1)  
1)  
F0  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
F6  
F7  
B
00  
F8  
P5  
0FF  
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
2)  
2)  
2)  
2)  
2)  
2)  
2)  
2)  
reserved  
reserved  
reserved  
reserved  
reserved  
reserved  
reserved  
XX  
XX  
XX  
XX  
XX  
XX  
XX  
F9  
reserved  
reserved  
reserved  
reserved  
reserved  
reserved  
reserved  
XX  
XX  
XX  
XX  
XX  
XX  
XX  
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
2)  
2)  
2)  
2)  
2)  
2)  
FA  
FB  
FC  
FD  
FE  
FF  
H
H
H
H
H
H
1) Bit-addressable Special Function Register  
2) X means that the value is indeterminate and the location is reserved  
Semiconductor Group  
232  
Device Specifications  
Table 2: Special Function Registers - Functional Blocks  
Block  
Symbol  
Name  
Address  
Contents  
after Reset  
1)  
1)  
CPU  
ACC  
B
DPH  
DPL  
PSW  
SP  
Accumulator  
B-Register  
Data Pointer, High Byte  
Data Pointer, Low Byte  
Program Status Word Register  
Stack Pointer  
0E0  
0F0  
00  
00  
00  
00  
00  
07  
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
83  
82  
H
H
1)  
1)  
0D0  
H
81  
H
2)  
A/D-  
Converter  
ADCON  
ADDAT  
DAPR  
A/D Converter Control Register  
A/D Converter Data Register  
D/A Converter Program Register  
0D8  
0D9  
0DA  
00X0 0000  
00  
00  
H
B
B
H
H
H
H
1)  
1)  
Interrupt  
System  
EN0  
IEN1  
IP0  
IP1  
IRCON  
TCON 2)  
Interrupt Enable Register 0  
Interrupt Enable Register 1  
Interrupt Priority Register 0  
Interrupt Priority Register 1  
Interrupt Request Control Register 0C0  
Timer Control Register  
0A8  
0B8  
0A9  
0B9  
00  
00  
00  
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
2)  
X000 0000  
XX00 0000  
00  
00  
1)  
1)  
3)  
H
B
1)  
88  
H
H
T2CON 2) Timer 2 Control Register  
0C8  
H
H
00  
H
Compare/  
Capture-  
Unit  
CCEN  
CCH1  
CCH2  
CCH3  
CCL1  
CCL2  
CCL3  
CRCH  
CRCL  
TH2  
Comp./Capture Enable Reg.  
0C1  
00  
00  
00  
00  
00  
00  
00  
00  
00  
00  
00  
00  
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
Comp./Capture Reg. 1, High Byte 0C3  
Comp./Capture Reg. 2, High Byte 0C5  
Comp./Capture Reg. 3, High Byte 0C7  
Comp./Capture Reg. 1, Low Byte  
Comp./Capture Reg. 2, Low Byte  
Comp./Capture Reg. 3, Low Byte  
Com./Rel./Capt. Reg. High Byte  
Com./Rel./Capt. Reg. Low Byte  
Timer 2, High Byte  
(CCU)  
0C2  
0C4  
0C6  
0CB  
0CA  
0CD  
0CC  
0C8  
H
H
H
TL2  
T2CON  
Timer 2, Low Byte  
Timer 2 Control Register  
H
1)  
H
1)  
Bit-addressable special function registers  
This special function register is listed repeatedly since some bits of it also belong  
to other functional blocks.  
2)  
3)  
X means that the value is indeterminate and the location is reserved  
Semiconductor Group  
233  
Device Specifications  
Table 2: Special Function Registers- Functional Blocks (cont’d)  
Block  
Symbol  
Name  
Address  
Contents  
after Reset  
1)  
1)  
Ports  
P0  
P1  
P2  
P3  
P4  
P5  
P6  
Port 0  
Port 1  
Port 2  
Port 3  
Port 4  
Port 5  
80  
90  
0A0  
0B0  
0E8  
0F8  
0DB  
0FF  
0FF  
0FF  
0FF  
0FF  
0FF  
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
1)  
1)  
1)  
1)  
H
H
H
H
Port 6, Analog/Digital Input  
H
2)  
Pow.Sav.M PCON  
odes  
Power Control Register  
87  
000X 0000  
H
B
1)  
2)  
2)  
ADCON 2)  
PCON 2)  
SBUF  
Serial  
Channels  
A/D Converter Control Reg.  
Power Control Register  
Serial Channel Buffer Reg.  
Serial Channel Control Reg.  
0D8  
00X0 0000  
000X 0000  
H
B
B
87  
99  
98  
H
H
H
3)  
0XX  
H
1)  
1)  
00  
SCON  
H
Timer 0/  
Timer 1  
TCON  
TH0  
TH1  
TL0  
TL1  
Timer Control Register  
Timer 0, High Byte  
Timer 1, High Byte  
Timer 0, Low Byte  
Timer 1, Low Byte  
Timer Mode Register  
88  
00  
00  
00  
00  
00  
00  
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
8C  
8D  
H
H
H
H
H
8A  
8B  
89  
TMOD  
1)  
1)  
IEN0 2)  
IEN1 2)  
IP0 2)  
Watchdog  
Interrupt Enable Register 0  
Interrupt Enable Register 1  
Interrupt Priority Register 0  
Interrupt Priority Register 1  
0A8  
0B8  
0A9  
00  
00  
H
H
H
H
2)  
3)  
X000 0000  
XX00 0000  
H
H
B
IP1 2)  
0B9  
B
1)  
Bit-addressable special function registers  
This special function register is listed repeatedly since some bits of it also belong  
to other functional blocks.  
2)  
3)  
X means that the value is indeterminate and the location is reserved  
Semiconductor Group  
234  
Device Specifications  
I/O Ports  
The SAB 80C515 has six 8-bit I/O ports and one 8-bit input port. Port 0 is an open-drain  
bidirectional I/O port, while ports 1 to 5 are quasi-bidirectional I/O ports with internal pullup  
resistors. That means, when configured as inputs, ports 1 to 5 will be pulled high and will source  
current when externally pulled low. Port 0 will float when configured as input.  
Port 0 and port 2 can be used to expand the program and data memory externally. During an  
access to external memory, port 0 emits the low-order address byte and reads/writes the data  
byte, while port 2 emits the high-order address byte. In this function, port 0 is not an open-drain  
port, but uses a strong internal pullup FET. Ports 1 and 3 are provided for several alternate  
functions, as listed below:  
Port Symbol  
Function  
P1.0 INT3/CC0 External interrupt 3 input, compare 0 output, capture 0 input  
P1.1 INT4/CC1 External interrupt 4 input, compare 1 output, capture 1 input  
P1.2 INT5/CC2 External interrupt 5 input, compare 2 output, capture 2 input  
P1.3 INT6/CC3 External interrupt 6 input, compare 3 output, capture 3 input  
P1.4 INT2  
P1.5 T2EX  
External interrupt 2 input  
Timer 2 external reload trigger input  
P1.6 CLKOUT System clock output  
P1.7 T2  
Timer 2 external count or gate input  
P3.0 R×D  
Serial port’s receiver data input (asynchronous) or data input/output  
(synchronous)  
P3.1 T×D  
Serial port’s transmitter data output (asynchronous) or clock output  
(synchronous)  
P3.2 INT0  
P3.3 INT1  
P3.4 T0  
External interrupt 0 input, timer 0 gate control  
External interrupt 1 input, timer 1 gate control  
Timer 0 external counter input  
P3.5 T1  
Timer 1 external counter input  
P3.6 WR  
P3.7 RD  
External data memory write strobe  
External data memory read strobe  
The SAB 80C515 has dual-purpose input port. As the ANx lines in the SAB 80515 (NMOS  
version), the eight port lines at port 6 can be used as analog inputs. But if the input voltages at  
port 6 meet the specified digital input levels (V an d V ), the port can also be used as digital  
IL  
IH  
input port. Reading the special function register P6 allows the user to input the digital values  
currently applied to the port pins. It is not necessary to select these modes by software; the  
voltages applied at port 6 pins can be converted to digital values using the A/D converter and  
at the same time the pins can be read via SFR P6.  
It must be noted, however, that the results in port P6 bits will be indeterminate if the levels at  
the corresponding pins are not within their respective V /V specifications. Furthermore, it is  
IL IH  
not possible to use port P6 as output lines. Special function register P6 is located at address  
0DB .  
H
Semiconductor Group  
235  
Device Specifications  
Timer/Counters  
The SAB 80C515 contains three 16-bit timers/counters which are useful in many applications  
for timing and counting. The input clock for each timer/counter is 1/12 of the oscillator frequency  
in the timer operation or can be taken from an external clock source for the counter operation  
(maximum count rate is 1/24 of the oscillator frequency).  
– Timer/Counter 0 and 1  
These timers/counters can operate in four modes:  
Mode 0: 8-bit timer/counter with 32:1 prescaler  
Mode 1: 16-bit timer/counter  
Mode 2: 8-bit timer/counter with 8-bit auto-reload  
Mode 3: Timer/counter 0 is configured as one 8-bit timer/counter and one 8-bit timer;  
Timer/counter 1 in this mode holds its count.  
External inputs INT0 and INT1 can be programmed to function as a gate for  
timer/counters 0 and 1 to facilitate pulse width measurements.  
– Timer/Counter 2  
Timer/counter 2 of the SAB 80C515 is a 16-bit timer/counter with several additional features. It  
offers a 2:1 prescaler, a selectable gate function, and compare, capture and reload functions.  
Corresponding to the 16-bit timer register there are four 16-bit capture/compare registers, one  
of them can be used to perform a 16-bit reload on a timer overflow or external event. Each of  
these registers corresponds to a pin of port 1 for capture input/compare output.  
Figure 3 shows a block diagram of timer/counter 2.  
Reload  
A 16-bit reload can be performed with the 16-bit CRC register consisting of CRCL and CRCH.  
There are two modes from which to select:  
Mode 0: Reload is caused by a timer 2 overflow (auto-reload).  
Mode 1: Reload is caused in response to a negative transition at pin T2EX (P1.5), which  
can also request an interrupt.  
Capture  
This feature permits saving the actual timer/counter contents into a selected register  
upon an external event or a software write operation. Two modes are provided to latch  
the current 16-bit value in timer 2 registers TL2 and TH2 into a dedicated capture register:  
Mode 0: Capture is performed in response to a transition at the corresponding port 1 pins  
CC0 to CC3.  
Mode 1: Write operation into the low-order byte of the dedicated capture register causes  
the timer 2 contents to be latched into this register.  
Semiconductor Group  
236  
Device Specifications  
Compare  
In the compare mode, the 16-bit values stored in the dedicated compare registers are  
compared to the contents of the timer 2 registers. If the count value in the timer 2  
registers matches one of the stored values, an appropriate output signal is generated and an  
interrupt is requested. Two compare modes are provided:  
Mode 0: Upon a match the output signal changes from low to high. It goes back to a low  
level when timer 2 overflows.  
Mode 1: The transition of the output signal can be determined by software.  
A timer 2 overflow causes no output change  
.
Figure 3  
Block Diagram of Timer/Counter 2  
Semiconductor Group  
237  
Device Specifications  
Serial Port  
The serial port of the SAB 80C515 enables full duplex communication between microcontrol-  
lers or between microcontroller and peripheral devices.  
The serial port can operate in 4 modes:  
Mode 0: Shift register mode. Serial data enters and exits through R×D. T×D outputs the  
shift clock. 8-bits are transmitted/received: 8 data bits (LSB first).  
The baud rate is fixed at 1/12 of the oscillator frequency.  
Mode 1: 10-bits are transmitted (through R×D) or received (through T×D): a start bit (0),  
8 data bits (LSB first), and a stop bit (1). The baud rate is variable.  
Mode 2: 11-bits are transmitted (through R×D) or received (through T×D): a start bit (0),  
8 data bits (LSB first), a programmable 9th data bit, and a stop bit (1).  
The baud rate is programmable to either 1/32 or 1/64 of the oscillator frequency.  
Mode 3: 11-bits are transmitted (through T×D) or received (through R×D): a start bit (0),  
8 data bits (LSB first), a programmable 9th data bit, and a stop bit (1). Mode 3  
is identical to mode 2 except for the baud rate. The baud rate in mode 3 is variable.  
The variable baud rates in modes 1 and 3 can be generated by timer 1 or an internal  
baud rate generator.  
A/D Converter  
The 8-bit A/D converter of the SAB 80C515 has eight multiplexed analog inputs (Port 6) and  
uses the successive approximation method.  
There are three characteristic time frames in a conversion cycle (see A/D converter  
characteristics): the conversion time tC, which is the time required for one conversion; the  
sample time t which is included in the conversion time and is measured from the start of the  
S
conversion; the load time t , which in turn is part of the sample time and also is measured from  
L
the conversion start.  
Within the load time t , the analog input capacitance C must be loaded to the analog inpult  
L
I
voltage level. For the rest of the sample time t , after the load time has passed, the selected  
S
analog input must be held constant. During the rest of the conversion time t the conversion  
C
itself is actually performed. Conversion can be programmed to be single or continuous; at the  
end of a conversion an interrupt can be generated.  
A unique feature is the capability of internal reference voltage programming. The internal  
reference voltages V  
and V  
for the A/D converter both are programmable to one  
I ntAREF  
I ntAGND  
of 16 steps with respect to the external reference voltages. This feature permits a conversion  
with a smaller internal reference voltage range to gain a higher resolution.  
In addition, the internal reference voltages can easily be adapted by software to the desired  
analog input voltage range.  
Figure 4 shows a block diagram of the A/D converter.  
Semiconductor Group  
238  
Device Specifications  
Figure 4  
Block Diagram of the A/D Converter  
Semiconductor Group  
239  
Device Specifications  
Interrupt Structure  
The SAB 80C515 has 12 interrupt vectors with the following vector addresses and request  
flags:  
Table 3  
Interrupt Sources and Vectors  
Source (Request Flags)  
Vector Address  
0003  
Vector  
IE0  
TF0  
IE1  
TF1  
External interrupt 0  
Timer 0 interrupt  
External interrupt 1  
Timer 1 interrupt  
H
000B  
H
H
0013  
001B  
H
RI + TI  
TF2 + EXF2  
IADC  
IEX2  
IEX3  
IEX4  
IEX5  
IEX6  
0023  
002B  
Serial port interrupt  
Timer 2 interrupt  
H
H
0043  
A/D converter interrupt  
External interrupt 2  
External interrupt 3  
External interrupt 4  
External interrupt 5  
External interrupt 6  
H
004B  
H
H
0053  
005B  
H
H
0063  
006B  
H
Each interrupt vector can be individually enabled/disabled. The minimum response time to an  
interrupt request is more than 3 machine cycles and less than 9 machine cycles.  
Figure 5 shows the interrupt request sources.  
External interrupts 0 and 1 can be activated by a low-level or a negative transition (selectable)  
at their corresponding input pin, external interrupts 2 and 3 can be programmed for triggering  
on a negative or a positive transition. The external interrupts 3 or 6 are combined with the  
corresponding alternate functions compare (output) and capture (input) on port 1.  
For programming of the priority levels the interrupt vectors are combined to pairs. Each pair can  
be programmed individually to one of four priority levels by setting or clearing one bit in the  
special function register IP0 and one in IP1.  
Figure 6 shows the priority level structure.  
Semiconductor Group  
240  
Device Specifications  
Figure 5  
Interrupt Request Sources  
Semiconductor Group  
241  
Device Specifications  
Figure 6  
Interrupt Priority Level Structure  
Semiconductor Group  
242  
Device Specifications  
Watchdog Timer  
This feature is provided as a means of graceful recovery from a software upset. After an  
external reset, the watchdog timer is cleared and stopped. It can be started and cleared by  
software, but it cannot be stopped during active mode of the device. If the software fails to clear  
the watchdog timer at least every 65532 machine cycles (about 65 ms if a 12 MHz oscillator  
frequency is used), an internal reset will be initiated. The reset cause (external reset or reset  
caused by the watchdog) can be examined by software. To clear the watchdog, two bits in two  
different special function registers must be set by two consecutive instructions (bits IEN0.6 and  
IEN1.6). This is done to prevent the watchdog from being cleared by unexpected opcodes.  
It must be noted, however, that the watchdog timer is halted during the idle mode and power-  
down mode of the processor (see section "Power Saving Modes" below).  
Therefore, it is possible to use the idle mode in combination with the watchdog timer function.  
But even the watchdog timer cannot reset the device when one of the power saving modes has  
been is entered accidentally.  
For these reasons several precautions are taken against unintentional entering of the power-  
down or idle mode (see below).  
Power Saving Modes  
The ACMOS technology of the SAB 80C515 allows two new power saving modes of the device:  
The idle mode and the power-down mode. These modes replace the power-down supply mode  
via pin V of the SAB 80515 (NMOS). The SAB 80C515 is supplied via  
PD  
pins V also during idle and power-down operation.  
CC  
However, there are applications where unintentional entering of these power saving modes  
must be absolutely avoided. Such critical applications often use the watchdog timer to prevent  
the system from program upsets. Then accidental entering of the power saving modes would  
even stop the watchdog timer and would circumvent the watchdog timer’s task of system  
protection.  
Thus, the SAB 80C515 has an extra pin that allows it to disable both of the power saving  
modes. When pin PE is held high, idle mode and power-down mode are completely disabled  
and the instruction sequences that are used for entering these modes (see below) will NOT  
affect the normal operations of the device. When PE is held low, the use of the idle mode and  
power-down mode is possible as described in the following sections.  
Pin PE has a weak internal pullup resistor. Thus, when left open, the power saving modes are  
disabled.  
The Special Function Register PCON  
In the NMOS version SAB 80515 the SFR PCON (address 87 ) contains only bit SMOD; in the  
H
CMOS version SAB 80C515 there are more bits used (see table 4).  
The bits PDE, PDS and IDLE, IDLS select the power-down mode or the idle mode, respectively,  
when the use of the power saving modes is enabled by pin PE (see next page).  
Semiconductor Group  
243  
Device Specifications  
If the power-down mode and the idle mode are set at the same time, power-down takes prece-  
dence.  
Furthermore, register PCON contains two general purpose flags. For example, the flag bits  
GF0 and GF1 can be used to give an indication if an interrupt occurred during normal operation  
or during an idle. Then an instruction that activates Idle can also set one or both flag bits. When  
idle is terminated by an interrupt, the interrupt service routine can examine the flag bits.  
The reset value of PCON is 000X0000 .  
B
Table 4  
SFR PCON (87 )  
H
SMOD  
PDS  
IDLS  
4
GF1  
3
GF0  
2
PDE  
1
IDLE  
0
87  
H
7
6
5
Symbol  
Position  
Function  
SMOD  
PCON.7  
When set, the baud rate of the serial channel in mode 1, 2,  
3 is doubled.  
PDS  
IDLS  
PCON.6  
Power-down start bit. The instruction that sets the PDS flag  
bit is the last instruction before entering the power-down  
mode.  
PCON.5  
Idle start bit. The instruction that sets the IDLS flag bit is the  
last instruction before entering the idle mode.  
PCON.4  
PCON.3  
PCON.2  
PCON.1  
Reserved  
GF1  
GF0  
PDE  
General purpose flag  
General purpose flag  
Power-down enable bit. When set, starting of the power-  
down mode is enabled.  
IDLE  
PCON.0  
Idle mode enable bit. When set, starting of the idle mode is  
enabled.  
Idle Mode  
In the idle mode the oscillator of the SAB 80C515 continues to run, but the CPU is gated off  
from the clock signal. However, the interrupt system, the serial port, the A/D converter, and all  
timers with the exception of the watchdog timer are further provided with the clock. The CPU  
status is preserved in its entirety: the stack pointer, program counter, program status word,  
accumulator, and all other registers maintain their data during idle mode.  
The reduction of power consumption, which can be achieved by this feature depends on the  
number of peripherals running.  
Semiconductor Group  
244  
Device Specifications  
If all timers are stopped and the A/D converter and the serial interface are not running, the  
maximum power reduction can be achieved. This state is also the test condition for the idle  
mode I (see DC characteristics, note 5).  
CC  
So the user has to take care which peripheral should continue to run and which has to be  
stopped during idle mode. Also the state of all port pins – either the pins controlled by their  
latches or controlled by their secondary functions – depends on the status of the controller  
when entering idle mode.  
Normally the port pins hold the logical state they had at the time idle mode was activated. If  
some pins are programmed to serve their alternate functions they still continue to output during  
idle mode if the assigned function is on. This applies to the compare outputs as well as to the  
clock output signal or to the serial interface in case it cannot finish reception or transmission  
during normal operation. The control signals ALE and PSEN hold at logic high levels (see  
table 5).  
Table 5  
Status of External Pins During Idle and Power-Down Mode  
Last instruction executed from  
internal code memory  
Last instruction executed from  
external code memory  
Outputs  
ALE  
Idle  
Power-down  
Low  
Idle  
Power-down  
Low  
High  
High  
Data  
High  
High  
Float  
PSEN  
Low  
Low  
PORT 0  
PORT 1  
Data  
Float  
Data/alternate  
outputs  
Data/last  
output  
Data/alternate  
outputs  
Data/last  
output  
PORT 2  
PORT 3  
Data  
Data  
Address  
Data  
Data/alternate  
outputs  
Data/last  
output  
Data/alternate  
outputs  
Data/last  
output  
PORT 4  
PORT 5  
Data  
Data  
Data  
Data  
Data  
Data  
Data  
Data  
As in normal operation mode, the ports can be used as inputs during idle mode. Thus a capture  
or reload operation can be triggered, the timers can be used to count external events, and  
external interrupts will be detected.  
The idle mode is a useful feature which makes it possible to "freeze" the processor's status –  
either for a predefined time, or until an external event reverts the controller to normal operation,  
as discussed below. The watchdog timer is the only peripheral which is automatically stopped  
during idle mode. If it were not disabled on entering idle mode, the watchdog timer would reset  
the controller, thus abandoning the idle mode.  
Semiconductor Group  
245  
Device Specifications  
When idle mode is used, pin PE must be held on low level. The idle mode is then entered by  
two consecutive instructions. The first instruction sets the flag bit IDLE (PCON.0) and must not  
set bit IDLS (PCON.5), the following instruction sets the start bit IDLS (PCON.5) and must not  
set bit IDLE (PCON.0). The hardware ensures that a concurrent setting of both bits, IDLE and  
IDLS, does not initiate the idle mode. Bits IDLE and IDLS will automatically be cleared after  
being set. If one of these register bits is read the value that appears is 0 (see table 4). This  
double instruction is implemented to minimize the chance of an unintentional entering of the  
idle mode which would leave the watchdog timer’s task of system protection without effect.  
Note that PCON is not a bit-addressable register, so the above mentioned sequence for  
entering the idle mode is obtained by byte-handling instructions, as shown in the following  
example:  
ORL  
ORL  
PCON,#00000001  
PCON,#00100000  
;Set bit IDLE, bit IDLS must not be set  
B
B
;Set bit IDLS, bit IDLE must not be set  
The instruction that sets bit IDLS is the last instruction executed before going into idle mode.  
There are two ways to terminate the idle mode:  
– The idle mode can be terminated by activating any enable interrupt. This interrupt will  
be serviced and normally the instruction to be executed following the RETI instruction  
will be the one following the instruction that sets the bit IDLS.  
– The other way to terminate the idle mode, is a hardware reset. Since the oscillator  
is still running, the hardware reset must be held active only for two machine cycles  
for a complete reset.  
Power-Down Mode  
In the power-down mode, the on-chip oscillator is stopped. Therefore all functions are stopped;  
only the contents of the on-chip RAM and the SFR's are maintained.The port pins controlled by  
their port latches output the values that are held by their SFR's.  
The port pins which serve the alternate output functions show the values they had at the end  
of the last cycle of the instruction which initiated the power-down mode; when the clockout  
signal (CLKOUT, P1.6) is enabled, it will stop at low level. ALE and PSEN hold at logic low  
level (see table 5).  
To enter the power-down mode the pin PE must be on low level. The power-down mode then  
is entered by two consecutive instructions. The first instruction has to set the flag bit PDE  
(PCON.1) and must not set bit PDS (PCON.6), the following instruction has to set the start bit  
PDS (PCON.6) and must not set bit PDE (PCON.1). The hardware ensures that a concurrent  
setting of both bits, PDE and PDS, does not initiate the power-down mode. Bits PDE and PDS  
will automatically be cleared after having been set and the value shown by reading one of these  
bits is always 0 (see table 4). This double instruction is implemented to minimize the chance of  
unintentionally entering the power-down mode which could possibly "freeze" the chip's activity  
in an undesired status.  
Semiconductor Group  
246  
Device Specifications  
Note that PCON is not a bit-addressable register, so the above mentioned sequence for  
entering the power-down mode is obtained by byte-handling instructions, as shown in the  
following example:  
ORL  
ORL  
PCON,#00000010  
PCON,#01000000  
;Set bit PDE, bit PDS must not be set  
;Set bit PDS, bit PDE must not be set  
B
B
The instruction that sets bit PDS is the last instruction executed before going into  
power-down mode.  
The only exit from power-down mode is a hardware reset. Reset will redefine all SFR’s, but will  
not change the contents of the internal RAM.  
In the power-down mode of operation, V can be reduced to minimize power consumption. It  
CC  
must be ensured, however, that V is not reduced before the power- down mode is invoked,  
CC  
and that V  
is restored to its normal operating level, before the power-down mode is  
CC  
terminated. The reset signal that terminates the power-down mode also restarts the oscillator.  
The reset should not be activated before V is restored to its normal operating level and must  
CC  
be held active long enough to allow the oscillator to restart and stabilize (similar to power-on  
reset).  
Differences in Pin Assignments of the SAB 80C515 and SAB 80515  
Since the SAB 80C515 is designed in CMOS technology, this device requires no V pin, be-  
B B  
cause the die’s substrate is internally connected to V .  
CC  
Furthermore, the RAM backup power supply via pin V is replaced by the software- controlled  
PD  
power-down mode and power supply via V  
.
CC  
Therefore, pins V  
and V  
of the NMOS version SAB 80515 are used for other functions in  
PD  
B B  
the SAB 80C515.  
Pin 4 (the former pin V ) is the new PE pin which enables the use of the power saving modes.  
PD  
Pin 37 (the former pin V ) becomes an additional V pin. Thus, it is possible to insert a  
BB  
CC  
decoupling capacitor between pin 37 (V ) and pin 38 (V ) very close to the device, thereby  
CC  
SS  
avoiding long wiring and reducing the voltage distortion resulting from high dynamic current  
peaks.  
There is a difference between the NMOS and CMOS version concerning the clock circuitry.  
When the device is driven from an external source, pin XTAL2 must be driven by the clock  
signal; pin XTAL1, however, must be left open in the SAB 80C515 (must be tied low in the  
NMOS version). When using the oscillator with a crystal there is no difference in the circuitry.  
Thus, due to its pin compatibility the SAB 80C515 normally substitutes any SAB 80515 without  
redesign of the user’s printed circuit board, but the user has to take care that the two V pins  
CC  
are hardwired on-chip. In any case, it is recommended that power is supplied on both V pins  
CC  
of the SAB 80C515 to improve the power supply to the chip.  
If the power saving modes are to be used, pin PE must be tied low, otherwise these modes are  
disabled.  
Semiconductor Group  
247  
Device Specifications  
Instruction Set  
The SAB 80C515 / 83C535 has the same instruction set as the industry standard 8051 micro-  
controller.  
A pocket guide is available which contains the complete instruction set in functional and hexa-  
decimal order. Furtheron it provides helpful information about Special Function Registers, In-  
terrupt Vectors and Assembler Directives.  
Literature Information  
Title  
Ordering No.  
Microcontroller Family SAB 8051 Pocket Guide  
B158-H6579-X-X-7600  
Semiconductor Group  
248  
Device Specifications  
Absolute Maximum Ratings  
Ambient temperature under bias  
SAB 80C515  
0 to 70 °C  
SAB 80C515-T3  
Storage temperature  
– 40 to 85 °C  
– 65 to 150 °C  
– 0.5 to 6.5 V  
Voltage on V  
pins with respect to ground (V )  
CC  
SS  
Voltage on any pin with respect to ground (V )  
– 0.5 to V + 0.5 V  
SS  
CC  
Input current on any pin during overload condition  
Absolute sum of all input currents during overload condition  
Power disipation  
– 10 mA to + 10 mA  
|100 mA|  
2 W  
Note Stresses above those listed under "Absolute Maximum Ratings" may cause permanent  
damage of the device. This is a stress rating only and functional operation of the device  
at these or any other conditions above those indicated in the operational sections of this  
specification is not implied. Exposure to absolute maximum rating conditions for longer  
periods may affect device reliability. During overload conditions (V > V or V < V )  
I N  
CC  
I N  
SS  
the Voltage on V pins with respect to ground (V ) must not exeed the values defined  
CC  
SS  
by the absolute maximum ratings.  
DC Characteristics  
= 5 V ± 10 %; V = 0 V  
V
CC  
SS  
T = 0 to 70 °C for the SAB 80C515/80C535  
A
T = 40 to 85 °C for the SAB 80C515/80C535-T3  
A
Parameter  
Symbol  
Limit values  
Unit Test condition  
min.  
max.  
Input low voltage (except EA)  
Input low voltage (EA)  
V
V
V
V
V
– 0.5  
0.2 V  
– 0.1  
V
V
V
V
V
I L  
CC  
– 0.5  
0.2 V  
I L1  
I H  
CC  
– 0.3  
Input high voltage  
(except RESET and XTAL2)  
0.2 V  
+ 0.9  
V
CC  
+ 0.5  
CC  
CC  
CC  
Input high voltage to XTAL2  
0.7 V  
V
CC  
+ 0.5  
I H1  
I H2  
Input high voltage to RESET  
0.6 V  
V
CC  
+ 0.5  
= 1.6 mA 1)  
Output low voltage, ports  
1, 2, 3, 4, 5  
V
– 0.45  
V
I
OL  
OL  
Notes see page 251.  
Semiconductor Group  
249  
 
Device Specifications  
DC Characteristics (cont’d)  
Parameter  
Symbol  
Limit values  
Unit Test condition  
min.  
max.  
Output low voltage, port 0,  
ALE, PSEN  
V
V
V
0.45  
V
I
= 3.2 mA 1)  
OL1  
OH  
OL  
Output high voltage, ports  
1, 2, 3, 4, 5  
2.4  
0.9 VC C  
V
V
I
I
= – 80 µA  
= – 10 µA  
OH  
OH  
Output high voltage (port 0 in  
external bus mode, ALE,  
PSEN)  
2.4  
0.9 VC C  
V
V
I
I
= – 400 µA  
= – 40 µA 2)  
OH1  
OH  
OH  
Logic 0 input current, ports 1, 2, I  
3, 4, 5  
– 10  
– 10  
– 70  
µA  
µA  
VIN = 0.45 V  
VIN = 0.45 V  
IL  
Input low current to RESET for  
reset  
I
– 100  
IL2  
Input low current (XTAL2)  
Input low current (PE)  
I
I
– 15  
– 20  
– 650  
µA  
µA  
µA  
VIN = 0.45 V  
VIN = 0.45 V  
I L3  
I L4  
TL  
Logical 1-to-0 transition current, I  
– 65  
V = 2 V  
IN  
ports 1, 2, 3, 4, 5  
Input leakage current  
(port 0, port 6, AN0-7, EA)  
I
± 1  
µA  
0.45 < V < V  
I N CC  
L I  
Pin capacitance  
C
10  
pF  
f = 1 MHz,  
C
I O  
T = 25 °C  
A
Power-supply current:  
Active mode, 12 MHz 6)  
Idle mode, 12 MHz 6)  
Active mode, 16 MHz 6)  
Idle mode, 16 MHz 6)  
Power-down mode  
I  
I  
I  
I  
I  
35  
13  
46  
17  
50  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
µA  
4)  
5)  
4)  
5)  
CC  
CC  
CC  
CC  
PD  
V
V
V
V
V
= 5 V  
= 5 V  
= 5 V  
= 5 V  
CC  
CC  
CC  
CC  
CC  
3)  
= 2 V to 5.5 V  
Notes see page 251.  
Semiconductor Group  
250  
Device Specifications  
Notes for page 249 and 250:  
1) Capacitive loading on ports 0 and 2 may cause spurious noise pulses to be  
superimposed on the V of ALE and ports 1, 3, 4 and 5. The noise is due to external bus  
OL  
capacitance discharging into the port 0 and port 2 pins when these pins make 1-to-0  
transitions during bus operation.  
In the worst case (capacitive loading > 100 pF), the noise pulse on ALE line may  
exceed 0.8 V.  
Then, it may be desirable to qualify ALE with a Schmitttrigger, or use an address latch  
with a Schmitttrigger strobe input.  
2) Capacitive loading on ports 0 and 2 may cause the VOH on ALE and PSEN to  
momentarily fall below the 0.9 V specification when the address bits are stabilizing.  
CC  
3) Power-down I is measured with: EA = Port 0 = Port 6 = V  
;
CC  
CC  
XTAL1 = N.C.; XTAL2 = V ; RESET = V ; V  
= V ; all other pins are disconnected.  
SS  
SS  
CC AGND  
4) I (active mode) is measured with: XTAL2 driven with the clock signal according  
CC  
to the figure below; XTAL1 = N.C.; EA = Port 0 = Port 6 = V ; RESET = V ; all other  
CC  
SS  
pins are disconnected. I might be slightly higher if a crystal oscillator is used.  
CC  
5) I (idle mode) is measured with: XTAL2 driven with the clock signal according to the  
CC  
figure below; XTAL1 = N.C.; EA = V ; Port 0 = Port 6 V ; RESET = V ; all other pins are  
SS  
CC  
CC  
disconnected; all on-chip peripherals are disabled.  
6) I at other frequencies is given by:  
CC  
Active mode: I  
(mA) = 2.67 × f  
(MHz) + 3.00  
OSC  
CC max  
Idle mode: I  
(mA) = 0.88 × f  
(MHz) + 2.50  
OSC  
CC max  
where f  
is the oscillator frequency in MHz.  
OSC  
I
is given in mA and measured at V = 5 V (see also notes 4 and 5)  
CC  
CC max  
Semiconductor Group  
251  
Device Specifications  
A/D Converter Characteristics  
V
V
= 5 V ± 10 %; V = 0 V; V  
= V ± 5 %; V  
= V ± 0.2 V;  
AGND SS  
CC  
SS  
AREF  
CC  
V  
1 V;  
T = 0 to 70 °C for SAB 80C515/80C535  
I ntAREF  
IntAGND  
A
T = – 40 to 85 °C for SAB 80C515/80C535-T40/85  
A
Parameter  
Symbol  
Limit values  
Unit  
Test condition  
min.  
typ.  
max.  
9)  
Analog input voltage  
V
C
V
0.2  
V
AREF  
+ 0.2  
V
AINPUT  
I
AGND  
7)  
Analog input  
capacitance  
25  
45  
pF  
Load time  
t
t
2 t  
7 t  
µs  
µs  
L
CY  
CY  
Sample time  
(incl. load time)  
S
C
Conversion time  
(incl. sample time)  
t
13 t  
± 2  
µs  
CY  
TUE  
Total unadjusted  
error  
± 1  
LSB  
V
V
V
V
=
I ntAREF  
= V  
AREF  
CC  
=
I ntAGND  
= V 7)  
AGND  
SS  
8)  
8)  
V
supply current  
I
5
mA  
mV  
AREF  
REF  
Internal reference error  
V
± 30  
I nt REFERR  
7)  
The output impedance of the analog source must be low enough to assure full loading  
of the sample capacitance (C ) during load time (tL ) . After charging of the internal  
I
capacitance (CI ) in the load time (tL) the analog input must be held constant for the rest  
of the sample time (t )  
S
8)  
9)  
The differential impedance r of the analog reference voltage source must be less than  
D
1 kat reference supply voltage.  
Exceeding these limit values at one or more input channels will cause additional  
current which is sinked / sourced at these channels. This may also affect the accuracy  
of other channels which are operated within these specifications.  
Semiconductor Group  
252  
Device Specifications  
AC Characteristics  
= 5 V ± 10%; V = 0 V (CL for Port 0, ALE and PSEN outputs = 100 pF;  
V
CC  
SS  
C for all outputs = 80 pF);  
T = 0 to 70 °C for SAB 80C515/80C535  
L
A
T = – 40 to 85 °C for SAB 80C515/80C535-T40/85  
A
Parameter  
Symbol  
Limit values  
Unit  
12 MHz clock  
Variable clock  
= 3.5 MHz to 12 MHz  
1/t  
CLCL  
min.  
max.  
min.  
max.  
Program Memory Characteristics  
ALE pulse width  
t
t
t
t
127  
2 t  
– 40  
C LCL  
ns  
ns  
ns  
LHLL  
AVLL  
LLAX  
LLIV  
Address setup to ALE  
Address hold after ALE  
53  
48  
t
t
– 30  
C LCL  
C LCL  
– 35  
ALE to valid instruction  
in  
233  
4 t  
– 100 ns  
C LCL  
C LCL  
ALE to PSEN  
t
t
58  
215  
t
– 25  
ns  
ns  
LLPL  
PLPH  
PLIV  
C LCL  
PSEN pulse width  
3 t  
– 35  
C LCL  
PSEN to valid instruction t  
in  
150  
3 t  
– 100 ns  
Input instruction hold  
after PSEN  
t
t
t
t
t
0
0
ns  
PXIX  
1)  
Input instruction float  
after PSEN  
63  
t
20  
C LCL  
ns  
ns  
PXIZ  
)
1
Address valid after  
PSEN  
75  
t
– 8  
C LCL  
PXAV  
A VIV  
A ZPL  
Address to valid instruc-  
tion in  
302  
5 t  
115 ns  
ns  
C LCL  
Address float to PSEN  
0
0
1)  
Interfacing the SAB 80C515 to devices with float times up to 75 ns is permissible.  
This limited bus contention will not cause any damage to port 0 drivers.  
Semiconductor Group  
253  
Device Specifications  
AC Characteristics (cont’d)  
Parameter Symbol  
Limit values  
Unit  
12 MHz clock  
Variable clock  
1/t  
= 3.5 MHz to 12 MHz  
CLCL  
min.  
max.  
min.  
max.  
External Data Memory Characteristics  
RD pulse width  
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
400  
400  
132  
6 t  
6 t  
2 t  
100  
ns  
ns  
ns  
RLRH  
WLWH  
LLAX2  
RLDV  
RHDX  
RHDZ  
LLDV  
CLCL  
CLCL  
CLCL  
WR pulse width  
100  
35  
Address hold after ALE  
RD to valid data in  
DATA hold after RD  
Data float after RD  
ALE to valid data in  
Address to valid data in  
ALE to WR or RD  
252  
5 t  
– 165 ns  
CLCL  
0
0
ns  
ns  
97  
2 t  
8 t  
9 t  
3 t  
– 70  
CLCL  
CLCL  
CLCL  
CLCL  
517  
585  
300  
123  
– 150 ns  
– 165 ns  
AVDV  
LLWL  
WHLH  
200  
43  
3 t  
– 50  
+ 50  
+ 40  
ns  
ns  
CLCL  
CLCL  
CLCL  
WR or RD high to ALE  
high  
t
– 40  
t
CLCL  
CLCL  
Address valid to WR  
t
t
203  
33  
4 t  
– 130  
ns  
ns  
AVWL  
QVWX  
Data valid to WR  
transition  
t
– 50  
CLCL  
Data setup before WR  
Data hold after WR  
t
t
t
288  
13  
0
7 t  
– 150  
– 50  
0
ns  
ns  
ns  
QVWH  
WHQX  
RLAZ  
t
CLCL  
Address float after RD  
Semiconductor Group  
254  
Device Specifications  
AC Characteristics (cont’d)  
Parameter  
Symbol  
Limit values  
Unit  
Variable clock  
Frequ. = 3.5 MHz to 12 MHz  
min.  
max.  
External Clock Drive  
Oscillator period  
Oscillator frequency  
High time  
t
83.3  
0.5  
20  
20  
285  
12  
ns  
CLCL  
1/t  
MHz  
ns  
CLCL  
t
t
t
t
CHCX  
Low time  
ns  
CLCX  
CLCH  
CHCL  
Rise time  
20  
20  
ns  
Fall time  
ns  
tCLCL  
V
CC- 0.5V  
0.45V  
0.7 VCC  
0.2 VCC- 0.1  
tCLCX  
tCHCX  
MCT00033  
tCHCL  
tCLCH  
External Clock Cycle  
Semiconductor Group  
255  
Device Specifications  
AC Characteristics (cont’d)  
Parameter  
Symbol  
Limit values  
Unit  
12 MHz clock  
Variable clock  
1/t  
= 3.5 MHz to 12 MHz  
CLCL  
min.  
max.  
min.  
max.  
System Clock Timing  
ALE to CLKOUT  
t
t
t
t
543  
7 t  
2 t  
– 40  
– 40  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
LLSH  
SHSL  
SLSH  
SLLH  
CLCL  
CLCL  
CLKOUT high time  
CLKOUT low time  
127  
793  
43  
10 t  
– 40  
CLCL  
CLKOUT low to ALE  
high  
123  
t
– 40  
t
+ 40  
CLCL  
CLCL  
System Clock Timing  
Semiconductor Group  
256  
Device Specifications  
AC Characteristics for SAB 80C515-16/80C535-16  
= 5 V ± 10 %; V = 0 V (CL for Port 0, ALE and PSEN outputs = 100 pF;  
V
CC  
SS  
CL for all outputs = 80 pF)  
T = 0 to 70 °C for SAB 80C515-16/80C535-16  
A
T = – 40 to 85 °C for SAB 80C515-16/80C535-16-T40/85  
A
Parameter  
Symbol  
Limit values  
Unit  
16 MHz clock  
Variable clock  
= 3.5 MHz to 16 MHz  
1/t  
CLCL  
min.  
max.  
min.  
max.  
Program Memory Characteristics  
ALE pulse width  
t
t
t
t
85  
2 t  
40  
C LC L  
ns  
ns  
ns  
LHLL  
AVLL  
LLAX  
LLIV  
Address setup to ALE  
Address hold after ALE  
33  
28  
t
t
30  
CLCL  
CLCL  
35  
ALE to valid instruction  
in  
150  
4 t  
100 ns  
CLCL  
ALE to PSEN  
t
t
38  
153  
t
25  
ns  
ns  
LLPL  
PLPH  
PLIV  
CLCL  
PSEN pulse width  
3 t  
35  
CLCL  
PSEN to valid instruction t  
88  
3 t  
100 ns  
CLCL  
in  
Input instruction hold  
after  
PSEN  
t
t
0
0
ns  
PXIX  
Input instruction float  
1)  
43  
t
20  
CLCL  
ns  
PXIZ  
after  
PSEN  
)
1
Address valid after  
PSEN  
t
t
t
55  
t
8  
ns  
115 ns  
ns  
PXAV  
AVIV  
AZPL  
CLCL  
Address to valid  
instruction in  
198  
5 t  
CLCL  
Address float to PSEN  
0
0
1)  
Interfacing the SAB 80C515-16 to devices with float times up to 55 ns is permissible.  
This limited bus contention will not cause any damage to port 0 drivers.  
Semiconductor Group  
257  
Device Specifications  
AC Characteristics (cont’d)  
Parameter Symbol  
Limit values  
Unit  
16 MHz clock  
Variable clock  
1/t  
= 3.5 MHz to 16 MHz  
CLCL  
min.  
max.  
min.  
max.  
External Data Memory Characteristics  
RDpulse width  
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
275  
275  
90  
6 t  
6 t  
2 t  
– 100  
ns  
ns  
ns  
RLRH  
WLWH  
LLAX2  
RLDV  
RHDX  
RHDZ  
LLDV  
CLCL  
CLCL  
CLCL  
WR pulse width  
– 100  
– 35  
Address hold after ALE  
RD to valid data in  
Data hold after RD  
Data float after RD  
ALE to valid data in  
Address to valid data in  
ALE to WR or RD  
148  
5 t  
– 165 ns  
CLCL  
0
0
ns  
ns  
ns  
55  
2 t  
– 70  
CLCL  
CLCL  
350  
398  
238  
103  
8t  
– 150  
9 t  
3 t  
– 165 ns  
AVDV  
LLWL  
WHLH  
CLCL  
CLCL  
138  
23  
3 t  
– 50  
+ 50  
ns  
ns  
CLCL  
CLCL  
CLCL  
WR or RD high to ALE  
high  
t
– 40  
t
+ 40  
CLCL  
CLCL  
Address valid to WR  
t
t
120  
13  
4 t  
– 130  
ns  
ns  
AVWL  
Data valid to WR transi-  
tion  
t
– 50  
QVWX  
CLCL  
Data setup before WR  
Data hold after WR  
t
t
t
288  
13  
0
7 t  
– 150  
– 50  
0
ns  
ns  
ns  
QVWH  
WHQX  
RLAZ  
t
CLCL  
Address float after RD  
Semiconductor Group  
258  
Device Specifications  
AC Characteristics (cont’d)  
Parameter  
Symbol  
Limit values  
Unit  
Variable clock  
Frequ. = 3.5 MHz to 16 MHz  
min.  
max.  
External Clock Drive  
Oscillator period  
Oscillator frequency  
High time  
t
62.5  
0.5  
15  
15  
285  
16  
ns  
CLCL  
1/t  
MHz  
ns  
CLCL  
t
t
t
t
CHCX  
Low time  
ns  
CLCX  
CLCH  
CHCL  
Rise time  
15  
15  
ns  
Fall time  
ns  
tCLCL  
V
CC- 0.5V  
0.45V  
0.7 VCC  
0.2 VCC- 0.1  
tCLCX  
tCHCX  
MCT00033  
tCHCL  
tCLCH  
External Clock Cycle  
Semiconductor Group  
259  
Device Specifications  
AC Characteristics (cont’d)  
Parameter  
Symbol  
Limit values  
Unit  
16 MHz clock  
Variable clock  
= 3.5 MHz to 16 MHz  
1/t  
CLCL  
min.  
max.  
min.  
max.  
System Clock Timing  
ALE to CLK OUT  
t
t
t
t
398  
7 t  
2 t  
– 40  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
LLSH  
SHSL  
SLSH  
SLLH  
CLCL  
CLCL  
CLK OUT high time  
CLK OUT low time  
85  
– 40  
– 40  
585  
23  
10 t  
CLCL  
CLK OUT low to ALE  
high  
103  
t
– 40  
t
+ 40  
CLCL  
CLCL  
System Clock Timing  
Semiconductor Group  
260  
Device Specifications  
AC Characteristics for SAB 80C515-20 / 80C535-20  
= 5 V ± 10 %; V = 0 V T = 0 °C to + 70 °C  
V
CC  
SS  
A
(C for port 0, ALE and PSEN outputs = 100 pF; C for all other outputs = 80 pF)  
L
L
Parameter  
Symbol  
Limit values  
Variable clock  
Unit  
20 MHz  
clock  
1/t  
= 3.5 MHz to 20 MHz  
CLCL  
min. max.  
min.  
max.  
Program Memory Characteristics  
ALE pulse width  
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
60  
20  
20  
2 t  
– 40  
ns  
ns  
ns  
LHLL  
AVLL  
LLAX  
LLIV  
CLCL  
Address setup to ALE  
Address hold after ALE  
ALE low to valid instr in  
ALE to PSEN  
t
t
– 30  
CLCL  
CLCL  
– 30  
100  
4 t  
– 100 ns  
CLCL  
25  
115  
t
– 25  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
LLPL  
PLPH  
PLIV  
PXIX  
CLCL  
PSEN pulse width  
PSEN to valid instr in  
3 t  
– 35  
CLCL  
75  
3 t  
– 75  
CLCL  
Input instruction hold  
after PSEN  
0
0
)
Input instruction float  
after PSEN  
t
*
40  
t
– 10  
CLCL  
ns  
PXIZ  
)
Address valid after PSEN  
Address to valid instr in  
Address float to PSEN  
t
t
t
*
47  
t
– 3  
CLCL  
ns  
ns  
ns  
PXAV  
AVIV  
AZPL  
190  
0
5 t  
– 60  
CLCL  
0
)
* Interfacing the SAB 80C515 / 80C535 microcontrollers to devices with float times up to 45 ns is permissible.  
This limited bus contention will not cause any damage to port 0 drivers.  
Semiconductor Group  
261  
Device Specifications  
AC Characteristics (cont’d)  
Parameter  
Symbol  
Limit values  
Unit  
20 MHz  
clock  
Variable clock  
1/t  
= 3.5 MHz to 20 MHz  
CLCL  
min. max.  
min.  
max.  
External Data Memory Characteristics  
RD pulse width  
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
200  
200  
65  
6 t  
6 t  
2 t  
– 100 –  
– 100 –  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
RLRH  
WLWH  
LLAX2  
RLDV  
RHDX  
RHDZ  
LLDV  
CLCL  
CLCL  
CLCL  
WR pulse width  
Address hold after ALE  
RD to valid data in  
Data hold after RD  
Data float after RD  
ALE to valid data in  
Address to valid data in  
ALE to WR or RD  
– 35  
155  
5 t  
– 95  
CLCL  
0
0
40  
250  
285  
200  
2 t  
8 t  
9 t  
3 t  
– 60  
CLCL  
CLCL  
CLCL  
CLCL  
– 150 ns  
– 165 ns  
AVDV  
LLWL  
AVWL  
WHLH  
100  
70  
20  
3 t  
4 t  
– 50  
+ 50  
ns  
ns  
ns  
CLCL  
Address valid to WR or RD t  
– 130 –  
CLCL  
WR or RD high to ALE  
high  
t
80  
t
– 30  
t
+ 30  
CLCL  
CLCL  
Data valid to WR transition  
Data setup before WR  
Data hold after WR  
t
t
t
t
5
0
t
– 45  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
QVWX  
QVWH  
WHQX  
RLAZ  
CLCL  
200  
10  
7 t  
CLCL  
– 150 –  
t
– 40  
0
CLCL  
Address float after RD  
Semiconductor Group  
262  
Device Specifications  
AC Characteristics (cont’d)  
Parameter  
Symbol  
Limit Values  
Variable clock  
Unit  
1/t  
= 3.5 MHz to 20 MHz  
CLCL  
min.  
max.  
External Clock Drive  
Oscillator period  
High time  
t
t
t
t
t
50  
12  
12  
285  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
CLCL  
CHCX  
CLCX  
CLCH  
CHCL  
t
t
t  
t  
CLCL  
CLCL  
CLCX  
CHCX  
Low time  
Rise time  
12  
12  
Fall time  
External Clock Cycle  
Semiconductor Group  
263  
Device Specifications  
AC Characteristics (cont’d)  
Parameter  
Symbol  
Limit values  
Variable clock  
Unit  
20 MHz  
clock  
1/t  
= 3.5 MHz to 20MHz  
CLCL  
min. max.  
min.  
max.  
System Clock Timing  
ALE to CLKOUT  
t
t
t
t
310  
60  
7 t  
2 t  
– 40  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
LLSH  
SHSL  
SLSH  
SLLH  
CLCL  
CLCL  
CLKOUT high time  
CLKOUT low time  
– 40  
– 40  
460  
10  
10 t  
CLCL  
CLKOUT low to ALE high  
90  
t
– 40  
t
+ 40  
CLCL  
CLCL  
External Clock Cycle  
Semiconductor Group  
264  
Device Specifications  
ROM Verification Characteristics  
T = 25 °C ± 5 °C; V = 5 V ± 10 %; V  
= 0 V  
A
CC  
SS  
Parameter  
Symbol  
Limit values  
Unit  
min.  
max.  
ROM Verification  
Address to valid data  
t
t
48 t  
48 t  
48 t  
6
ns  
AVQV  
ELQV  
EHOZ  
CLCL  
CLCL  
CLCL  
ENABLE to valid data  
ns  
Data float after ENABLE t  
0
4
ns  
Oscillator frequency  
Address to valid data  
1/t  
MHz  
ns  
CLCL1  
t
48 t  
AVQV  
CLCL  
P1.0 - P1.7  
P2.0 - P2.4  
Address  
t AVQV  
Port 0  
Data OUT  
t ELQV  
tEHQZ  
P2.7  
ENABLE  
MCT00049  
V
Address: P1.0 - P1.7 = A0 - A7  
P2.0 - P2.4 = A8 - A12  
Inputs: P2.5 - P2.6, PSEN =  
ALE, EA =  
VSS  
V IH  
P0.0 - P0.7 = D0 - D7  
RESET =  
Data:  
SS  
ROM Verification  
Semiconductor Group  
265  
Device Specifications  
Waveforms  
t LHLL  
ALE  
PSEN  
Port 0  
Port 2  
t AVLL  
t PLPH  
t LLPL  
t
LLIV  
t
PLIV  
t AZPL  
t LLAX  
t
PXAV  
PXIZ  
t
t PXIX  
A0 - A7  
Instr.IN  
A0 - A7  
t
AVIV  
A8 - A15  
A8 - A15  
MCT00096  
Program Memory Read Cycle  
tWHLH  
ALE  
PSEN  
RD  
t LLDV  
t LLWL  
t RLRH  
t RLDV  
t AVLL  
tRHDZ  
t LLAX2  
t RLAZ  
tRHDX  
A0 - A7 from  
Ri or DPL  
A0 - A7  
from PCL  
Instr.  
IN  
Port 0  
Data IN  
tAVWL  
t AVDV  
Port 2  
P2.0 - P2.7 or A8 - A15 from DPH  
A8 - A15 from PCH  
MCT00097  
Data Memory Read Cycle  
Semiconductor Group  
266  
Device Specifications  
tWHLH  
ALE  
PSEN  
WR  
t LLWL  
t WLWH  
tQVWX  
t AVLL  
tWHQX  
t LLAX2  
tQVWH  
A0 - A7 from  
Ri or DPL  
A0 - A7  
from PCL  
Instr.IN  
Port 0  
Port 2  
Data OUT  
tAVWL  
P2.0 - P2.7 or A8 - A15 from DPH  
A8 - A15 from PCH  
MCT00098  
AC inputs during testing are driven at VC C – 0.5 V for a logic '1' and 0.45 V for a logic '0'.  
Timing measurements are made at VIH min for a logic '1' and VIL max for a logic '0'.  
Data Memory Write Cycle  
For timing purposes a port pin is no longer floating when a 100 mV change from load voltage occurs and  
begins to float when a 100 mV deviation from the load voltage VO H/V O L occurs. IO L/I O H ≥ ± 20 mA.  
Recommended Oscillator Circuits  
Semiconductor Group  
267  
Device Specifications  
AC Testing: Input, Output Waveforms  
AC Testing: Float Waveforms  
Semiconductor Group  
268  
Device Specifications  
Package Outlines  
Plastic Package, P-LCC-68 – SMD  
(Plastic Leaded Chip-Carrier)  
Sorts of Packing  
Package outlines for tubes, trays etc. are contained in our  
Data Book “Package Information”.  
SMD = Surface Mounted Device  
Dimensions in mm  
Semiconductor Group  
269  
Device Specifications  
Package Outlines  
Plastic Package, P-MQFP-80 – SMD  
(Plastic Metric Quad Flat Package)  
Sorts of Packing  
Package outlines for tubes, trays etc. are contained in our  
Data Book “Package Information”.  
SMD = Surface Mounted Device  
Dimensions in mm  
Semiconductor Group  
270  

相关型号:

SAB80C535-M-T40/85

8-Bit CMOS Single-Chip Microcontroller
INFINEON

SAB80C535-M-T85

Microcontroller, 8-Bit, 16MHz, CMOS, PQFP80, PLASTIC, MQFP-80
INFINEON

SAB80C535-N

8-Bit CMOS Single-Chip Microcontroller
INFINEON

SAB80C535-N-T40/85

8-Bit CMOS Single-Chip Microcontroller
INFINEON

SAB80C535-N-T85

Microcontroller, 8-Bit, 16MHz, CMOS, PQCC68, PLASTIC, LCC-68
INFINEON

SAB80C53516NDATR

Microcontroller, 8-Bit, 16MHz, CMOS, PQCC68
INFINEON

SAB80C53516NLBTR

Microcontroller, 8-Bit, 16MHz, CMOS, PQCC68, PLASTIC, LCC-68
INFINEON

SAB80C535N

8-Bit CMOS Single-Chip Microcontroller
INFINEON

SAB80C537

8-Bit CMOS Single-Chip Microcontroller
INFINEON

SAB80C537-M

8-Bit CMOS Single-Chip Microcontroller
INFINEON

SAB80C537-M-T40

Microcontroller, 8-Bit, 8051 CPU, 12MHz, CMOS, PQFP100, METRIC, PLASTIC, QFP-100
INFINEON

SAB80C537-M-T40/110

Microcontroller, 8-Bit, 12MHz, CMOS, PQFP100, METRIC, PLASTIC, QFP-100
INFINEON